HETEROARYL SUBSTITUTED PYRROLO[2,3-b]PYRIDINES AND PYRROLO[2,3-b]PYRIMIDINES AS JANUS KINASE INHIBITORS

Abstract

20 26 20 44 26 09 J un 2 02 6 A B S T R A C T 2 0 2 6 2 0 4 4 2 6 0 9 J u n 2 0 2 6 A B S T R A C T 2 0 2 6 2 0 4 4 2 6 0 9 J u n 2 0 2 6

Description

5 FIELD OF THE INVENTION The present invention provides heteroaryl substituted pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridines and heteroaryl 10 substituted pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyrimidines that modulate the activity of Janus kinases and are useful in the treatment of diseases related to activity of Janus kinases including, for example, immune-related diseases, skin disorders, myeloid proliferative disorders, cancer, and other diseases. BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION 15           Protein kinases (PKs) are a group of enzymes that regulate diverse, important biological processes including cell growth, survival and differentiation, organ formation and morphogenesis, neovascularization, tissue repair and regeneration, among others. Protein kinases exert their physiological functions through catalyzing the phosphorylation of proteins (or substrates) and thereby modulating the cellular activities of the substrates in various biological contexts. In addition to the 20 functions in normal tissues / organs, many protein kinases also play more specialized roles in a host of human diseases including cancer. A subset of protein kinases (also referred to as oncogenic protein kinases), when dysregulated, can cause tumor formation and growth, and further contribute to tumor maintenance and progression (Blume-Jensen P et al, Nature 2001, 411(6835):355-365). Thus far, oncogenic protein kinases represent one of the largest and most attractive groups of protein targets for 25 cancer intervention and drug development. Protein kinases can be categorized as receptor type and non-receptor type. Receptor tyrosine kinases (RTKs) have an extracellular portion, a transmembrane domain, and an intracellular portion, while non-receptor tyrosine kinases are entirely intracellular. RTK mediated signal transduction is typically initiated by extracellular interaction with a specific growth factor (ligand), typically followed 30 by receptor dimerization, stimulation of the intrinsic protein tyrosine kinase activity, and receptor transphosphorylation. Binding sites are thereby created for intracellular signal transduction molecules and lead to the formation of complexes with a spectrum of cytoplasmic signaling molecules that facilitate the appropriate cellular response such as cell division, differentiation, metabolic effects, and changes in the extracellular microenvironment 35           At present, at least nineteen (19) distinct RTK subfamilies have been identified. One RTK subfamily, designated the HER subfamily, includes EGFR, HER2, HER3 and HER4, and bind such ligands as epithelial growth factor (EGF), TGF-a, amphiregulin, HB-EGF, betacellulin and heregulin. 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 A second family of RTKs, designated the insulin subfamily, includes the INS-R, the IGF-1R and the IR-R. A third family, the "PDGF" subfamily, includes the PDGF alpha and beta receptors, CSFIR, c-kit and FLK-II. Another subfamily of RTKs, referred to as the FLK subfamily, encompasses the Kinase insert Domain-Receptor fetal liver kinase-1 (KDR / FLK-1), the fetal liver kinase 4 (FLK-4) 5 and the fms-like tyrosine kinase 1 (flt-1). Two other subfamilies of RTKs have been designated as the FGF receptor family (FGFR1, FGFR2, FGFR3 and FGFR4) and the Met subfamily (c-Met, Ron and Sea). For a detailed discussion of protein kinases, see for example, Blume-Jensen, P. et al., Nature. 2001, 411(6835):355-365, and Manning, G. et al., Science. 2002, 298(5600):1912-1934. The non-receptor type of tyrosine kinases is also composed of numerous subfamilies, 10 including Src, Btk, Abl, Fak, and Jak. Each of these subfamilies can be further subdivided into multiple members that have been frequently linked to oncogenesis. The Src family, for example, is the largest and includes Src, Fyn, Lck and Fgr among others. For a detailed discussion of these kinases, see Bolen JB. Nonreceptor tyrosine protein kinases. Oncogene. 1993, 8(8):2025-31. A significant number of tyrosine kinases (both receptor and nonreceptor) are associated with 15 cancer (see Madhusudan S, Ganesan TS. Tyrosine kinase inhibitors in cancer therapy. Clin Biochem. 2004, 37(7):618-35.). Clinical studies suggest that overexpression or dysregulation of tyrosine kinases may also be of prognostic value. For example, members of the HER family of RTKs have been associated with poor prognosis in breast, colorectal, head and neck and lung cancer. Mutation of c-Kit tyrosine kinase is associated with decreased survival in gastrointestinal stromal tumors. In acute 20 myelogenous leukemia, Flt-3 mutation predicts shorter disease free survival. VEGFR expression, which is important for tumor angiogenesis, is associated with a lower survival rate in lung cancer. Tie-1 kinase expression inversely correlates with survival in gastric cancer. BCR-Abl expression is an important predictor of response in chronic myelogenous leukemia and Src tyrosine kinase is an indicator of poor prognosis in all stages of colorectal cancer. 25           The immune system responds to injury and threats from pathogens. Cytokines are low- molecular weight polypeptides or glycoproteins that stimulate biological responses in virtually all cell types. For example, cytokines regulate many of the pathways involved in the host inflammatory response to sepsis. Cytokines influence cell differentiation, proliferation and activation, and they can modulate both proinflammatory and anti-inflammatory responses to allow the host to react 30 appropriately to pathogens. Binding of a cytokine to its cell surface receptor initiates intracellular signaling cascades that transduce the extracellular signal to the nucleus, ultimately leading to changes in gene expression. The pathway involving the Janus kinase family of protein tyrosine kinases (JAKs) and Signal Transducers and Activators of Transcription (STATs) is engaged in the signaling of a wide range of cytokines. 35 Generally, cytokine receptors do not have intrinsic tyrosine kinase activity, and thus require receptor-associated kinases to propagate a phosphorylation cascade. JAKs fulfill this function. Cytokines bind to their receptors, causing receptor dimerization, and this enables JAKs to phosphorylate each other as 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 well as specific tyrosine motifs within the cytokine receptors. STATs that recognize these phosphotyrosine motifs are recruited to the receptor, and are then themselves activated by a JAK-dependent tyrosine phosphorylation event. Upon activation, STATs dissociate from the receptors, dimerize, and translocate to the nucleus to bind to specific DNA sites and alter transcription (Scott, M. 5    J., C. J. Godshall, et al. (2002). "Jaks, STATs, Cytokines, and Sepsis." Clin Diagn Lab Immunol 9(6): 1153-9). The JAK family plays a role in the cytokine-dependent regulation of proliferation and function of cells involved in immune response. Currently, there are four known mammalian JAK family members: JAK1 (also known as Janus kinase-1), JAK2 (also known as Janus kinase-2), JAK3 10 (also known as Janus kinase, leukocyte; JAKL; L-JAK and Janus kinase-3) and TYK2 (also known as protein-tyrosine kinase 2). The JAK proteins range in size from 120 to 140 kDa and comprise seven conserved JAK homology (JH) domains; one of these is a functional catalytic kinase domain, and another is a pseudokinase domain potentially serving a regulatory function and / or serving as a docking site for STATs (Scott, Godshall et al. 2002, supra). 15          While JAK1, JAK2 and TYK2 are ubiquitously expressed, JAK3 is reported to be preferentially expressed in natural killer (NK) cells and not resting T cells, suggesting a role in lymphoid activation (Kawamura, M., D. W. McVicar, et al. (1994). "Molecular cloning of L-JAK, a Janus family protein-tyrosine kinase expressed in natural killer cells and activated leukocytes." Proc Natl Acad Sci U S A 91(14): 6374-8). 20           Not only do the cytokine-stimulated immune and inflammatory responses contribute to normal host defense, they also play roles in the pathogenesis of diseases: pathologies such as severe combined immunodeficiency (SCID) arise from hypoactivity and suppression of the immune system, and a hyperactive or inappropriate immune / inflammatory response contributes to the pathology of autoimmune diseases such as rheumatoid and psoriatic arthritis, asthma and systemic lupus 25 erythematosus, inflammatory bowel disease, multiple sclerosis, type I diabetes mellitus, myasthenia gravis, thyroiditis, immunoglobulin nephropathies, myocarditis as well as illnesses such as scleroderma and osteoarthritis (Ortmann, R. A., T. Cheng, et al. (2000). "Janus kinases and signal transducers and activators of transcription: their roles in cytokine signaling, development and immunoregulation." Arthritis Res 2(1): 16-32). Furthermore, syndromes with a mixed presentation of 30 autoimmune and immunodeficiency disease are quite common (Candotti, F., L. Notarangelo, et al. (2002). "Molecular aspects of primary immunodeficiencies: lessons from cytokine and other signaling pathways." J Clin Invest 109(10):  1261-9). Thus, therapeutic agents are typically aimed at augmentation or suppression of the immune and inflammatory pathways, accordingly. Deficiencies in expression of JAK family members are associated with disease states. Jak1- / - 35 mice are runted at birth, fail to nurse, and die perinatally (Rodig, S. J., M. A. Meraz, et al. (1998). "Disruption of the Jak1 gene demonstrates obligatory and nonredundant roles of the Jaks in cytokine-induced biologic responses." Cell 93(3): 373-83). Jak2- / - mouse embryos are anemic and die around 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 day 12.5 postcoitum due to the absence of definitive erythropoiesis. JAK2-deficient fibroblasts do not respond to IFN gamma, although responses to IFNalpha / beta and IL-6 are unaffected. JAK2 functions in signal transduction of a specific group of cytokine receptors required in definitive erythropoiesis (Neubauer, H., A. Cumano, et al. (1998). Cell 93(3): 397-409; Parganas, E., D. Wang, et al. (1998). 5 Cell 93(3): 385-95.). JAK3 appears to play a role in normal development and function of B and T lymphocytes. Mutations of JAK3 are reported to be responsible for autosomal recessive severe combined immunodeficiency (SCID) in humans (Candotti, F., S. A. Oakes, et al. (1997). "Structural and functional basis for JAK3-deficient severe combined immunodeficiency." Blood 90(10): 39964003). 10          The JAK / STAT pathway, and in particular all four members of the JAK family, are believed to play a role in the pathogenesis of the asthmatic response, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, bronchitis, and other related inflammatory diseases of the lower respiratory tract. For instance, the inappropriate immune responses that characterize asthma are orchestrated by a subset of CD4+ T helper cells termed T helper 2 (Th2) cells. Signaling through the cytokine receptor IL-4 stimulates 15 JAK1 and JAK3 to activate STAT6, and signaling through IL-12 stimulates activation of JAK2 and TYK2, and subsequent phosphorylation of STAT4. STAT4 and STAT6 control multiple aspects of CD4+ T helper cell differentiation (Pernis, A. B. and P. B. Rothman (2002). "JAK-STAT signaling in asthma." J Clin Invest 109(10): 1279-83). Furthermore, TYK2-deficient mice were found to have enhanced Th2 cell-mediated allergic airway inflammation (Seto, Y., H. Nakajima, et al. (2003). 20 "Enhanced Th2 cell-mediated allergic inflammation in Tyk2-deficient mice." J Immunol 170(2): 1077-83). Moreover, multiple cytokines that signal through JAK kinases have been linked to inflammatory diseases or conditions of the upper respiratory tract such as those affecting the nose and sinuses (e.g. rhinitis, sinusitis) whether classically allergic reactions or not. The JAK / STAT pathway has also been implicated to play a role in inflammatory 25 diseases / conditions of the eye including, but not limited to, iritis, uveitis, scleritis, conjunctivitis, as well as chronic allergic responses. Therefore, inhibition of JAK kinases may have a beneficial role in the therapeutic treatment of these diseases. The JAK / STAT pathway, and in particular, JAK3, also plays a role in cancers of the immune system. In adult T cell leukemia / lymphoma (ATLL), human CD4+ T cells acquire a transformed 30 phenotype, an event that correlates with acquisition of constitutive phosphorylation of JAKs and STATs. Furthermore, an association between JAK3 and STAT-1, STAT-3, and STAT-5 activation and cell-cycle progression was demonstrated by both propidium iodide staining and bromodeoxyuridine incorporation in cells of four ATLL patients tested. These results imply that JAK / STAT activation is associated with replication of leukemic cells and that therapeutic approaches 35 aimed at JAK / STAT inhibition may be considered to halt neoplastic growth (Takemoto, S., J. C. Mulloy, et al. (1997). "Proliferation of adult T cell leukemia / lymphoma cells is associated with the constitutive activation of JAK / STAT proteins." Proc Natl Acad Sci U S A 94(25): 13897-902). 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 Blocking signal transduction at the level of the JAK kinases holds promise for developing treatments for human cancers. Cytokines of the interleukin 6 (IL-6) family, which activate the signal transducer gp130, are major survival and growth factors for human multiple myeloma (MM) cells. The signal transduction of gp130 is believed to involve JAK1, JAK2 and Tyk2 and the downstream 5 effectors STAT3 and the mitogen-activated protein kinase (MAPK) pathways. In IL-6-dependent MM cell lines treated with the JAK2 inhibitor tyrphostin AG490, JAK2 kinase activity and ERK2 and STAT3 phosphorylation were inhibited. Furthermore, cell proliferation was suppressed and apoptosis was induced (De Vos, J., M. Jourdan, et al. (2000). "JAK2 tyrosine kinase inhibitor tyrphostin AG490 downregulates the mitogen-activated protein kinase (MAPK) and signal transducer and activator of 10 transcription (STAT) pathways and induces apoptosis in myeloma cells." Br J Haematol 109(4): 8238). However, in some cases, AG490 can induce dormancy of tumor cells and actually then protect them from death. Activation of JAK / STAT in cancers may occur by multiple mechanisms including cytokine stimulation (e.g. IL-6 or GM-CSF) or by a reduction in the endogenous suppressors of JAK signaling 15 such as SOCS (suppressor or cytokine signaling) or PIAS (protein inhibitor of activated STAT) (Boudny, V., and Kovarik, J., Neoplasm. 49:349-355, 2002). Importantly, activation of STAT signaling, as well as other pathways downstream of JAKs (e.g. Akt), has been correlated with poor prognosis in many cancer types (Bowman, T., et al. Oncogene 19:2474-2488, 2000). Moreover, elevated levels of circulating cytokines that signal through JAK / STAT may adversely impact patient 20 health as they are thought to play a causal role in cachexia and / or chronic fatigue. As such, JAK inhibition may be therapeutic for the treatment of cancer patients for reasons that extend beyond potential anti-tumor activity. The cachexia indication may gain further mechanistic support with realization that the satiety factor leptin signals through JAKs. Pharmacological targeting of Janus kinase 3 (JAK3) has been employed successfully to 25 control allograft rejection and graft versus host disease (GVHD). In addition to its involvement in signaling of cytokine receptors, JAK3 is also engaged in the CD40 signaling pathway of peripheral blood monocytes. During CD40-induced maturation of myeloid dendritic cells (DCs), JAK3 activity is induced, and increases in costimulatory molecule expression, IL-12 production, and potent allogeneic stimulatory capacity are observed. A rationally designed JAK3 inhibitor WHI-P-154 30 prevented these effects arresting the DCs at an immature level, suggesting that immunosuppressive therapies targeting the tyrosine kinase JAK3 may also affect the function of myeloid cells (Saemann, M. D., C. Diakos, et al. (2003). "Prevention of CD40-triggered dendritic cell maturation and induction of T-cell hyporeactivity by targeting of Janus kinase 3." Am J Transplant 3(11): 1341-9). In the mouse model system, JAK3 was also shown to be an important molecular target for treatment of 35 autoimmune insulin-dependent (type 1) diabetes mellitus. The rationally designed JAK3 inhibitor JANEX-1 exhibited potent immunomodulatory activity and delayed the onset of diabetes in the NOD mouse model of autoimmune type 1 diabetes (Cetkovic-Cvrlje, M., A. L. Dragt, et al. (2003). 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 "Targeting JAK3 with JANEX-1 for prevention of autoimmune type 1 diabetes in NOD mice." Clin Immunol 106(3): 213-25). It has been suggested that inhibition of JAK2 tyrosine kinase can be beneficial for patients with myeloproliferative disorder. (Levin, et al., Cancer Cell, vol. 7,  2005:  387-397) 5 Myeloproliferative disorder (MPD) includes polycythemia vera (PV), essential thrombocythemia (ET), myeloid metaplasia with myelofibrosis (MMM), chronic myelogenous leukemia (CML), chronic myelomonocytic leukemia (CMML), hypereosinophilic syndrome (HES) and systemic mast cell disease (SMCD). Although the myeloproliferative disorder (such as PV, ET and MMM) are thought to be caused by acquired somatic mutation in hematopoietic progenitors, the genetic basis for 10 these diseases has not been known. However, it has been reported that hematopoietic cells from a majority of patients with PV and a significant number of patients with ET and MMM possess a recurrent somatic activating mutation in the JAK2 tyrosine kinase. It has also been reported that inhibition of the JAK2V617F kinase with a small molecule inhibitor leads to inhibition of proliferation of hematopoietic cells, suggesting that the JAK2 tyrosine kinase is a potential target for 15 pharmacologic inhibition in patients with PV, ET and MMM. Inhibition of the JAK kinases is also envisioned to have therapeutic benefits in patients suffering from skin immune disorders such as psoriasis, and skin sensitization. In psoriasis vulgaris, the most common form of psoriasis, it has been generally accepted that activated T lymphocytes are important for the maintenance of the disease and its associated psoriatic plaques (Gottlieb, A.B., et al, 20 Nat Rev Drug Disc., 4:19-34). Psoriatic plaques contain a significant immune infiltrate, including leukocytes and monocytes, as well as multiple epidermal layers with increased keratinocyte proliferation. While the initial activation of immune cells in psoriasis occurs by an ill defined mechanism, the maintenance is believed to be dependent on a number of inflammatory cytokines, in addition to various chemokines and growth factors (JCI, 113:1664-1675). Many of these, including 25 interleukins -2, -4, -6, -7, -12, -15, -18, and -23 as well as GM-CSF and IFNg, signal through the Janus (JAK) kinases (Adv Pharmacol. 2000;47:113-74). As such, blocking signal transduction at the level of JAK kinases may result in therapeutic benefits in patients suffering from psoriasis or other immune disorders of the skin. It has been known that certain therapeutics can cause immune reactions such as skin rash or 30 diarrhea in some patients. For instance, administration of some of the new targeted anti-cancer agents such as Iressa, Erbitux, and Tarceva has induced acneiform rash with some patients. Another example is that some therapeutics used topically induce skin irritation, skin rash, contact dermatitis or allergic contact sensitization. For some patients, these immune reactions may be bothersome, but for others, the immune reactions such as rash or diarrhea may result in inability to continue the treatment. 35 Although the driving force behind these immune reactions has not been elucidated completely at the present time, these immune reactions are likely linked to immune infiltrate. 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 Inhibitors of Janus kinases or related kinases are widely sought and several publications report effective classes of compounds. For example, certain inhibitors are reported in WO 99 / 65909, US 2004 / 0198737; WO 2004 / 099204; WO 2004 / 099205; and WO 01 / 42246. Heteroaryl substituted pyrroles and other compounds are reported in WO 2004 / 72063 and WO 99 / 62908. 5           Thus, new or improved agents which inhibit kinases such as Janus kinases are continually needed that act as immunosuppressive agents for organ transplants, as well as agents for the prevention and treatment of autoimmune diseases (e.g., multiple sclerosis, rheumatoid arthritis, asthma, type I diabetes, inflammatory bowel disease, Crohn’s disease, autoimmune thyroid disorders, Alzheimer’s disease), diseases involving a hyperactive inflammatory response (e.g., eczema), 10 allergies, cancer (e.g., prostate, leukemia, multiple myeloma), and some immune reactions (e.g., skin rash or contact dermatitis or diarrhea) caused by other therapeutics, to name a few. The compounds, compositions and methods described herein are directed toward these needs and other ends. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention provides compounds of Formula I: 15 (Y)n-Z or pharmaceutically acceptable salt forms or prodrugs thereof, wherein constituent members are defined herein. The present invention further provides compositions comprising a compound of Formula I, or 20 pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. The present invention further provides methods of modulating an activity of JAK comprising contacting JAK with a compound of Formula I, or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. The present invention further provides methods of treating a disease in a patient, wherein the disease is associated with JAK activity, comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically 25 effective amount of a compound of Formula I, or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. The present invention further provides compounds of Formula I for use in therapy. The present invention further provides compounds of Formula I for the preparation of a medicament for use in therapy. The compounds of the present invention may exist in various forms and / or derivatives, such 30 as salts and hydrates. The compounds of the present invention may be useful for a range of purposes, 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 including inhibition of Janus kinases in an in vitro context. The form or derivative of the compound best suited for one purpose may not be the form or derivative best suited for another purpose. DETAILED DESCRIPTION 5           The present invention provides, inter alia, compounds that modulate the activity of one or more JAKs and are useful, for example, in the treatment of diseases associated with JAK expression or activity. The compounds of the invention have Formula I: (Y)n-Z 10 including pharmaceutically acceptable salt forms or prodrugs thereof, wherein: A1 and A2 are independently selected from C and N; T, U, and V are independently selected from O, S, N, CR5, and NR6; wherein the 5-membered ring formed by A1, A2, U, T, and V is aromatic; X is N or CR4; 15            Y is C1-8 alkylene, C2-8 alkenylene, C2-8 alkynylene, (CR11R12)p-(C3-10 cycloalkylene)- (CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)p-(arylene)-(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)p-(C1-10heterocycloalkylene)-(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)p-(heteroarylene)-(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pO(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pS(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pC(O)(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pC(O)NRc(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pC(O)O(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pOC(O)(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pOC(O)NRc(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pNRc(CR11R12)q, 20    (CR11R12)pNRcC(O)NRd(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pS(O)(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pS(O)NRc(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pS(O)2(CR11R12)q, or (CR11R12)pS(O)2NRc(CR11R12)q, wherein said C1-8 alkylene, C2-8 alkenylene, C2-8 alkynylene, cycloalkylene, arylene, heterocycloalkylene, or heteroarylene, is optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituents independently selected from -D1-D2-D3-D4; Z is H, halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, C1-4 25 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, =C-Ri, =N-Ri, Cy1, CN, NO2, ORa, SRa, C(O)Rb, C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, OC(O)Rb, OC(O)NRcRd, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, NRcC(O)NRcRd, NRcC(O)ORa, C(=NRi)NRcRd, NRcC(=NRi)NRcRd, S(O)Rb, S(O)NRcRd, S(O)2Rb, NRcS(O)2Rb, C(=NOH)Rb, C(=NO(C1-6 alkyl)Rb, and S(O)2NRcRd, wherein said C1-8 alkyl, C2-8 alkenyl, or C2-8 alkynyl, is optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents independently selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, 30    C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, NO2, ORa, SRa, C(O)Rb, C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, OC(O)Rb, OC(O)NRcRd, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 NRcC(O)NRcRd, NRcC(O)ORa, C(=NRi)NRcRd, NRcC(=NRi)NRcRd, S(O)Rb, S(O)NRcRd, S(O)2Rb, NRcS(O)2Rb, C(=NOH)Rb, C(=NO(C1-6 alkyl))Rb, and S(O)2NRcRd; wherein when Z is H, n is 1; or the -(Y)n-Z moiety is taken together with i) A2 to which the moiety is attached, ii) R5 or R6 5 of either T or V, and iii) the C or N atom to which the R5 or R6 of either T or V is attached to form a 4- to 20-membered aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, or heterocycloalkyl ring fused to the 5-membered ring formed by A1, A2, U, T, and V, wherein said 4- to 20-membered aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, or heterocycloalkyl ring is optionally substituted by 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 substituents independently selected from -(W)m-Q; 10           W is C1-8 alkylenyl, C2-8 alkenylenyl, C2-8 alkynylenyl, O, S, C(O), C(O)NRc’, C(O)O, OC(O), OC(O)NRc’, NRc’, NRc’C(O)NRd’, S(O), S(O)NRc’, S(O)2, or S(O)2NRc’; Q is H, halo, CN, NO2, C1-8 alkyl, C2-8 alkenyl, C2-8 alkynyl, C1-8 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, or heterocycloalkyl, wherein said C1-8 alkyl, C2-8 alkenyl, C2-8 alkynyl, C1-8 haloalkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, or heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3 or 4 15 substituents independently selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy2, CN, NO2, ORa’, SRa’, C(O)Rb’, C(O)NRc’Rd’, C(O)ORa’, OC(O)Rb’, OC(O)NRc’Rd’, NRc’Rd’, NRc’C(O)Rb’, NRc’C(O)NRc’Rd’, NRc’C(O)ORa’, S(O)Rb’, S(O)NRc’Rd’, S(O)2Rb’, NRc’S(O)2Rb’, and S(O)2NRc’Rd’; Cy1 and Cy2 are independently selected from aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, and 20 heterocycloalkyl, each optionally substituted by 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 substituents independently selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, CN, NO2, ORa’’, SRa’’, C(O)Rb’’, C(O)NRc’’Rd’’, C(O)ORa’’, OC(O)Rb’’, OC(O)NRc’’Rd’’, NRc’’Rd’’, NRc’’C(O)Rb’’, NRc’’C(O)ORa’’, NRc’’S(O)Rb’’, NRc’’S(O)2Rb’’, S(O)Rb’’, S(O)NRc’’Rd’’, S(O)2Rb’’, and S(O)2NRc’’Rd’’; 25            R1, R2, R3, and R4 are independently selected from H, halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, CN, NO2, OR7, SR7, C(O)R8, C(O)NR9R10, C(O)OR7 OC(O)R8, OC(O)NR9R10, NR9R10, NR9C(O)R8, NRcC(O)OR7, S(O)R8, S(O)NR9R10, S(O)2R8, NR9S(O)2R8, and S(O)2NR9R10; R5 is H, halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, CN, NO2, 30   OR7, SR7, C(O)R8, C(O)NR9R10, C(O)OR7, OC(O)R8, OC(O)NR9R10, NR9R10, NR9C(O)R8, NR9C(O)OR7, S(O)R8, S(O)NR9R10, S(O)2R8, NR9S(O)2R8, or S(O)2NR9R10; R6 is H, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, OR7, C(O)R8, C(O)NR9R10, C(O)OR7, S(O)R8, S(O)NR9R10, S(O)2R8, or S(O)2NR9R10; R7 is H, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, 35 heterocycloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl or heterocycloalkylalkyl; R8 is H, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl or heterocycloalkylalkyl; 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 R9 and R10 are independently selected from H, C1-10 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, C1-6 alkylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl, C1-6 alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl and heterocycloalkylalkyl; or R9 and R10 together with the N atom to which they are attached form a 4-, 5-, 6- or 7 5 membered heterocycloalkyl group; R11 and R12 are independently selected from H and -E1-E2-E3-E4; D1 and E1 are independently absent or independently selected from C1-6 alkylene, C2-6 alkenylene, C2-6 alkynylene, arylene, cycloalkylene, heteroarylene, and heterocycloalkylene, wherein each of the C1-6 alkylene, C2-6 alkenylene, C2-6 alkynylene, arylene, cycloalkylene, heteroarylene, and 10 heterocycloalkylene is optionally substituted by 1, 2 or 3 substituents independently selected from halo, CN, NO2, N3, SCN, OH, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C2-8 alkoxyalkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, C1-6 haloalkoxy, amino, C1-6 alkylamino, and C2-8 dialkylamino; D2 and E2 are independently absent or independently selected from C1-6 alkylene, C2-6 alkenylene, C2-6 alkynylene, (C1-6 alkylene)r-O-( C1-6 alkylene)s, (C1-6 alkylene)r-S-(C1-6 alkylene)s, (C1-6 15    alkylene)r-NRe-(C1-6 alkylene)s, (C1-6 alkylene)r-CO-(C1-6 alkylene)s, (C1-6 alkylene)r-COO-(C1-6 alkylene)s, (C1-6 alkylene)r-CONRe-(C1-6 alkylene)s, (C1-6 alkylene)r-SO-(C1-6 alkylene)s, (C1-6 alkylene)r-SO2-(C1-6 alkylene)s, (C1-6 alkylene)r-SONRe-(C1-6 alkylene)s, and (C1-6 alkylene)r-NReCONRf-(C1-6 alkylene)s, wherein each of the C1-6 alkylene, C2-6 alkenylene, and C2-6 alkynylene is optionally substituted by 1, 2 or 3 substituents independently selected from halo, CN, NO2, N3, SCN, 20 OH, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C2-8 alkoxyalkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, C1-6 haloalkoxy, amino, C1-6 alkylamino, and C2-8 dialkylamino; D3 and E3 are independently absent or independently selected from C1-6 alkylene, C2-6 alkenylene, C2-6 alkynylene, arylene, cycloalkylene, heteroarylene, and heterocycloalkylene, wherein each of the C1-6 alkylene, C2-6 alkenylene, C2-6 alkynylene, arylene, cycloalkylene, heteroarylene, and 25 heterocycloalkylene is optionally substituted by 1, 2 or 3 substituents independently selected from halo, CN, NO2, N3, SCN, OH, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C2-8 alkoxyalkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, C1-6 haloalkoxy, amino, C1-6 alkylamino, and C2-8 dialkylamino; D4 and E4 are independently selected from H, halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, NO2, ORa, SRa, C(O)Rb, 30   C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, OC(O)Rb, OC(O)NRcRd, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, NRcC(O)NRcRd, NRcC(O)ORa, C(=NRi)NRcRd, NRcC(=NRi)NRcRd, S(O)Rb, S(O)NRcRd, S(O)2Rb, NRcS(O)2Rb, C(=NOH)Rb, C(=NO(C1-6 alkyl)Rb, and S(O)2NRcRd, wherein said C1-8 alkyl, C2-8 alkenyl, or C2-8 alkynyl, is optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents independently selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, 35   NO2, ORa, SRa, C(O)Rb, C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, OC(O)Rb, OC(O)NRcRd, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, NRcC(O)NRcRd, NRcC(O)ORa, C(=NRi)NRcRd, NRcC(=NRi)NRcRd, S(O)Rb, S(O)NRcRd, S(O)2Rb, NRcS(O)2Rb, C(=NOH)Rb, C(=NO(C1-6 alkyl))Rb, and S(O)2NRcRd; 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 Ra is H, Cy1, -(C1-6 alkyl)-Cy1, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, wherein said C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, or C2-6 alkynyl is optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituents independently selected from OH, CN, amino, halo, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl; 5             Rb is H, Cy1, -(C1-6 alkyl)-Cy1, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, wherein said C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, or C2-6 alkynyl is optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituents independently selected from OH, CN, amino, halo, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl; Ra’ and Ra’’ are independently selected from H, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 10 alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl and heterocycloalkylalkyl, wherein said C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl or heterocycloalkylalkyl is optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituents independently selected from OH, CN, amino, halo, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, 15 heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl; Rb’ and Rb’’ are independently selected from H, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl and heterocycloalkylalkyl, wherein said C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl or 20 heterocycloalkylalkyl is optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituents independently selected from OH, CN, amino, halo, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl; Rc and Rd are independently selected from H, Cy1, -(C1-6 alkyl)-Cy1, C1-10 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, wherein said C1-10 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, or C2-6 25 alkynyl, is optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituents independently selected from Cy1, -(C1-6 alkyl)-Cy1, OH, CN, amino, halo, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl,and halosulfanyl; or Rc and Rd together with the N atom to which they are attached form a 4-, 5-, 6- or 7membered heterocycloalkyl group optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituents independently selected from Cy1, -(C1-6 alkyl)-Cy1, OH, CN, amino, halo, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, 30 and halosulfanyl; Rc’ and Rd’ are independently selected from H, C1-10 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl and heterocycloalkylalkyl, wherein said C1-10 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl or 35 heterocycloalkylalkyl is optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituents independently selected from OH, CN, amino, halo, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl; 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 or Rc’ and Rd’ together with the N atom to which they are attached form a 4-, 5-, 6- or 7membered heterocycloalkyl group optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituents independently selected from OH, CN, amino, halo, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl; 5            Rc’’ and Rd’’ are independently selected from H, C1-10 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl and heterocycloalkylalkyl, wherein said C1-10 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl or heterocycloalkylalkyl is optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituents independently selected from 10 OH, CN, amino, halo, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl; or Rc’’ and Rd’’ together with the N atom to which they are attached form a 4-, 5-, 6- or 7membered heterocycloalkyl group optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituents independently selected from OH, CN, amino, halo, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, aryl, 15 arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl; Ri is H, CN, NO2, or C1-6 alkyl; Re and Rf are independently selected from H and C1-6 alkyl; Ri is H, CN, or NO2; m is 0 or 1; 20            n is 0 or 1; p is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; q is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6; r is 0 or 1; and s is 0 or 1. 25           In some embodiments, when X is N, n is 1, and the moiety formed by A1, A2, U, T, V, and —(Y)n-Z has the formula: (Y)n-Z 5S —   ; then Y is other than (CR11R12)pC(O)NRc(CR11R12)q. In some embodiments, when X is N, the 5-membered ring formed by A1, A2, U, T, and V is 30 other than pyrrolyl. In some embodiments, when X is CH, n is 1, and the moiety formed by A1, A2, U, T, V, and -(Y)n-Z has the formula: 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 (Y)n-Z V —   ; then -(Y)n-Z is other than COOH. In some embodiments, when X is CH or C-halo, R1, R2, and R3 are each H, n is 1, and the moiety formed by A1, A2, U, T, V, and -(Y)n-Z has the formula: then Y is other than (CR11R12)pC(O)NRc(CR11R12)q or (CR11R12)pC(O)(CR11R12)q. In some embodiments, when X is CH or C-halo, R1, R2, and R3 are each H, n is 0, and the moiety formed by A1, A2, U, T, V, and -(Y)n-Z has the formula: 10 then Z is other than CN, halo, or C1-4 alkyl. In some embodiments, when X is CH or C-halo, R1, R2, and R3 are each H, n is 1, and the moiety formed by A1, A2, U, T, V, and -(Y)n-Z has the formula: or then Y is other than (CR11R12)pC(O)NRc(CR11R12)q or (CR11R12)pC(O)(CR11R12)q. 15           In some embodiments, when X is CH or C-halo, R1, R2, and R3 are each H, n is 1, and the moiety formed by A1, A2, U, T, V, and -(Y)n-Z has the formula: then Y is other than (CR11R12)pNRc(CR11R12)q. In some embodiments, when X is CH or C-halo and R1, R2, and R3 are each H, then the 20 moiety formed by A1, A2, U, T, V, and -(Y)n-Z has a formula other than: 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 In some embodiments: Z is H, halo, CN, NO2, C1-8 alkyl, C2-8 alkenyl, C2-8 alkynyl, C1-8 haloalkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, or heterocycloalkyl, wherein said C1-8 alkyl, C2-8 alkenyl, C2-8 alkynyl, C1-8 haloalkyl, aryl, 5 cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, or heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents independently selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, NO2, ORa, SRa, C(O)Rb, C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, OC(O)Rb, OC(O)NRcRd, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, NRcC(O)NRcRd, NRcC(O)ORa, C(=NRi)NRcRd, NRcC(=NRi)NRcRd, S(O)Rb, S(O)NRcRd, S(O)2Rb, NRcS(O)2Rb, and S(O)2NRcRd; 10            Q is H, halo, CN, NO2, C1-8 alkyl, C2-8 alkenyl, C2-8 alkynyl, C1-8 haloalkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, or heterocycloalkyl, wherein said C1-8 alkyl, C2-8 alkenyl, C2-8 alkynyl, C1-8 haloalkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, or heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3 or 4 substituents independently selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy2, CN, NO2, ORa’, SRa’, C(O)Rb’, C(O)NRc’Rd’, C(O)ORa’, OC(O)Rb’, 15   OC(O)NRc’Rd’, NRc’Rd’, NRc’C(O)Rb’, NRc’C(O)NRc’Rd’, NRc’C(O)ORa’, S(O)Rb’, S(O)NRc’Rd’, S(O)2Rb’, NRc’S(O)2Rb’, and S(O)2NRc’Rd’; Cy1 and Cy2 are independently selected from aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, and heterocycloalkyl, each optionally substituted by 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 substituents independently selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, CN, NO2, ORa’’, 20    SRa’’, C(O)Rb’’, C(O)NRc’’Rd’’, C(O)ORa’’, OC(O)Rb’’, OC(O)NRc’’Rd’’, NRc’’Rd’’, NRc’’C(O)Rb’’, NRc’’C(O)ORa’’, NRc’’S(O)Rb’’, NRc’’S(O)2Rb’’, S(O)Rb’’, S(O)NRc’’Rd’’, S(O)2Rb’’, and S(O)2NRc’’Rd’’; R1, R2, R3, and R4 are independently selected from H, halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, CN, NO2, OR7, SR7, C(O)R8, C(O)NR9R10, C(O)OR7 OC(O)R8, OC(O)NR9R10, NR9R10, NR9C(O)R8, NRcC(O)OR7, S(O)R8, 25   S(O)NR9R10, S(O)2R8, NR9S(O)2R8, and S(O)2NR9R10; R5 is H, halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, CN, NO2, OR7, SR7, C(O)R8, C(O)NR9R10, C(O)OR7, OC(O)R8, OC(O)NR9R10, NR9R10, NR9C(O)R8, NR9C(O)OR7, S(O)R8, S(O)NR9R10, S(O)2R8, NR9S(O)2R8, or S(O)2NR9R10; R6 is H, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, OR7, C(O)R8, C(O)NR9R10, 30   C(O)OR7, S(O)R8, S(O)NR9R10, S(O)2R8, or S(O)2NR9R10; R7 is H, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl or heterocycloalkylalkyl; 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 R8 is H, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl or heterocycloalkylalkyl; R9 and R10 are independently selected from H, C1-10 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, C1-6 alkylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl, C1-6 alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, 5 heterocycloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl and heterocycloalkylalkyl; or R9 and R10 together with the N atom to which they are attached form a 4-, 5-, 6- or 7membered heterocycloalkyl group; R11 and R12 are independently selected from H, halo, OH, CN, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, and 10 heterocycloalkyl; Ra, Ra’, and Ra’’ are independently selected from H, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl and heterocycloalkylalkyl, wherein said C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl or heterocycloalkylalkyl 15 is optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituents independently selected from OH, CN, amino, halo, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl; Rb, Rb’ and Rb’’ are independently selected from H, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl and heterocycloalkylalkyl, wherein said C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, aryl, cyclo- 20 alkyl, heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl or heterocycloalkylalkyl is optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituents independently selected from OH, CN, amino, halo, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl; Rc and Rd are independently selected from H, C1-10 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 25 alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl and heterocycloalkylalkyl, wherein said C1-10 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl or heterocycloalkylalkyl is optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituents independently selected from OH, CN, amino, halo, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl or 30 heterocycloalkyl; or Rc and Rd together with the N atom to which they are attached form a 4-, 5-, 6- or 7membered heterocycloalkyl group optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituents independently selected from OH, CN, amino, halo, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl; 35            Rc’ and Rd’ are independently selected from H, C1-10 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl and heterocycloalkylalkyl, wherein said C1-10 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, aryl, hetero- 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl or heterocycloalkylalkyl is optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituents independently selected from OH, CN, amino, halo, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl; 5            or Rc’ and Rd’ together with the N atom to which they are attached form a 4-, 5-, 6- or 7 membered heterocycloalkyl group optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituents independently selected from OH, CN, amino, halo, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl; Rc’’ and Rd’’ are independently selected from H, C1-10 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 10 alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl and heterocycloalkylalkyl, wherein said C1-10 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl or heterocycloalkylalkyl is optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituents independently selected from OH, CN, amino, halo, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl and 15 heterocycloalkyl; and or Rc’’ and Rd’’ together with the N atom to which they are attached form a 4-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered heterocycloalkyl group optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituents independently selected from OH, CN, amino, halo, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl. 20          In some embodiments, X is N. In some embodiments, X is CR4. In some embodiments, A1 is C. In some embodiments, A1 is N. In some embodiments, A2 is C. 25          In some embodiments, A2 is N. In some embodiments, at least one of A1, A2, U, T, and V is N. In some embodiments, the 5-membered ring formed by A1, A2, U, T, and V is pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, or oxadiazolyl. In some embodiments, the 5-membered ring formed by A1, A2, U, T, and V is selected from: 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 wherein: a designates the site of attachment of moiety -(Y)n-Z; b designates the site of attachment to the core moiety: 5           c and c’ designate the two sites of attachment of the fused 4- to 20-membered aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, or heterocycloalkyl ring. In some embodiments, the 5-membered ring formed by A1, A2, U, T, and V is selected from: n           w-jv            - - - b      , b , b       , b ,      b bb        b         b         b ,,  ,, 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 wherein: a designates the site of attachment of moiety -(Y)n-Z; b designates the site of attachment to the core moiety: 5           c and c’ designate the two sites of attachment of the fused 4- to 20-membered aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, or heterocycloalkyl ring. In some embodiments, the 5-membered ring formed by A1, A2, U, T, and V is selected from: 10 bb , wherein: a designates the site of attachment of moiety -(Y)n-Z; b designates the site of attachment to the core moiety: 15           c and c’ designate the two sites of attachment of the fused 4- to 20-membered aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, or heterocycloalkyl ring. In some embodiments, the 5-membered ring formed by A1, A2, U, T, and V is selected from: 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 wherein: b       ,b      ,       b       , b ,b a designates the site of attachment of moiety -(Y)n-Z; b designates the site of attachment to the core moiety: b , and b In some embodiments, the 5-membered ring formed by A1, A2, U, T, and V is selected from: b , b ,      b , and b wherein: 10 a designates the site of attachment of moiety -(Y)n-Z; b designates the site of attachment to the core moiety: 15 In some embodiments, the 5-membered ring formed by A1, A2, U, T, and V is selected from: a^ N—N^ Y b wherein: a designates the site of attachment of moiety -(Y)n-Z; b designates the site of attachment to the core moiety: 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 In some embodiments, n is 0. In some embodiments, n is 1. In some embodiments, n is 1 and Y is C1-8 alkylene, C2-8 alkenylene, 5    (CR11R12)pC(O)(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pC(O)NRc(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pC(O)O(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pOC(O)(CR11R12)q, wherein said C1-8 alkylene or C2-8 alkenylene, is optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 halo, OH, CN, amino, C1-4 alkylamino, or C2-8 dialkylamino. In some embodiments, n is 1 and Y is C1-8 alkylene, (CR11R12)pC(O)(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pC(O)NRc(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pC(O)O(CR11R12)q, wherein said C1-8 alkylene is optionally 10 substituted with 1, 2, or 3 halo, OH, CN, amino, C1-4 alkylamino, or C2-8 dialkylamino. In some embodiments, n is 1 and Y is C1-8 alkylene optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 halo, OH, CN, amino, C1-4 alkylamino, or C2-8 dialkylamino. In some embodiments, n is 1 and Y is ethylene optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 halo, OH, CN, amino, C1-4 alkylamino, or C2-8 dialkylamino. 15           In some embodiments, n is 1 and Y is (CR11R12)pC(O)(CR11R12)q (CR11R12)pC(O)NRc- (CR11R12)q, or (CR11R12)pC(O)O(CR11R12)q. In some embodiments, Y is C1-8 alkylene, C2-8 alkenylene, C2-8 alkynylene, (CR11R12)p-(C3-10 cycloalkylene)-(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)p-(arylene)-(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)p-(C1-10 heterocycloalkylene)-(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)p-(heteroarylene)-(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pO(CR11R12)q, or (CR11R12)pS(CR11R12)q, 20 wherein said C1-8 alkylene, C2-8 alkenylene, C2-8 alkynylene, cycloalkylene, arylene, heterocycloalkylene, or heteroarylene, is optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituents independently selected from -D1-D2-D3-D4. In some embodiments, Y is C1-8 alkylene, C2-8 alkenylene, C2-8 alkynylene, (CR11R12)p-(C3-10 cycloalkylene)-(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)p-(arylene)-(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)p-(C1-10 heterocycloalkylene)- 25    (CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)p-(heteroarylene)-(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pO(CR11R12)q, or (CR11R12)pS(CR11R12)q, wherein said C1-8 alkylene, C2-8 alkenylene, C2-8 alkynylene, cycloalkylene, arylene, heterocycloalkylene, or heteroarylene, is optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituents independently selected from D4. In some embodiments, Y is C1-8 alkylene, C2-8 alkenylene, C2-8 alkynylene, or (CR11R12)p-(C3- 30    10 cycloalkylene)-(CR11R12)q, wherein said C1-8 alkylene, C2-8 alkenylene, C2-8 alkynylene, or cycloalkylene, is optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituents independently selected from -D1-D2-D3-D4. In some embodiments, Y is C1-8 alkylene, C2-8 alkenylene, C2-8 alkynylene, or (CR11R12)p-(C3-10 cycloalkylene)-(CR11R12)q, wherein said C1-8 alkylene, C2-8 alkenylene, C2-8 alkynylene, or 35 cycloalkylene, is optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituents independently selected from D4. In some embodiments, Y is C1-8 alkylene, C2-8 alkenylene, or C2-8 alkynylene, each optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituents independently selected from -D1-D2-D3-D4. 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 In some embodiments, Y is C1-8 alkylene optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituents independently selected from -D1-D2-D3-D4. In some embodiments, Y is C1-8 alkylene optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituents independently selected from D4. 5           In some embodiments, Y is C1-8 alkylene, C2-8 alkenylene, C2-8 alkynylene, (CR11R12)pO- (CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pS(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pC(O)(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pC(O)NRc(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pC(O)O(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pOC(O)(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pOC(O)NRc(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pNRc(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pNRcC(O)NRd(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pS(O)(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pS(O)NRc(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pS(O)2(CR11R12)q, or (CR11R12)pS(O)2NRc(CR11R12)q, 10 wherein said C1-8 alkylene, C2-8 alkenylene, C2-8 alkynylene is optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituents independently selected from halo, OH, CN, amino, C1-4 alkylamino, and C2-8 dialkylamino. In some embodiments, Y is C1-8 alkylene, C2-8 alkenylene, C2-8 alkynylene, (CR11R12)p-(C3-10 cycloalkylene)-(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)p-(arylene)-(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)p-(C1-10 heterocycloalkylene)- 15    (CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)p-(heteroarylene)-(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pO(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pS(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pC(O)(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pC(O)NRc(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pC(O)O(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pOC(O)(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pOC(O)NRc(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pNRc(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pNRcC(O)NRd(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pS(O)(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pS(O)NRc(CR11R12)q, (CR11R12)pS(O)2(CR11R12)q, or (CR11R12)pS(O)2NRc(CR11R12)q, wherein said C1-8 alkylene, C2-8 20 alkenylene, C2-8 alkynylene, cycloalkylene, arylene, heterocycloalkylene, or heteroarylene, is optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituents independently selected from halo, OH, CN, amino, C1-4 alkylamino, and C2-8 dialkylamino. In some embodiments, p is 0. In some embodiments, p is 1. 25           In some embodiments, p is 2. In some embodiments, q is 0. In some embodiments, q is 1. In some embodiments, q is 2. In some embodiments, one of p and q is 0 and the other of p and q is 1, 2, or 3. 30            In some embodiments, Z is H, halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, NO2, ORa, SRa, C(O)Rb, C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, OC(O)Rb, OC(O)NRcRd, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, NRcC(O)NRcRd, NRcC(O)ORa, C(=NRi)NRcRd, NRcC(=NRi)NRcRd, S(O)Rb, S(O)NRcRd, S(O)2Rb, NRcS(O)2Rb, C(=NOH)Rb, C(=NO(C1-6 alkyl)Rb, and S(O)2NRcRd, wherein said C1-8 alkyl, C2-8 alkenyl, or C2-8 alkynyl, is 35 optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents independently selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, NO2, ORa, SRa, C(O)Rb, C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, OC(O)Rb, OC(O)NRcRd, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 NRcC(O)NRcRd, NRcC(O)ORa, C(=NRi)NRcRd, NRcC(=NRi)NRcRd, S(O)Rb, S(O)NRcRd, S(O)2Rb, NRcS(O)2Rb, C(=NOH)Rb, C(=NO(C1-6 alkyl))Rb, and S(O)2NRcRd. In some embodiments, Z is aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, or heterocycloalkyl, each optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, 5 C1-4 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, NO2, ORa, SRa, C(O)Rb, C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, OC(O)Rb, OC(O)NRcRd, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, NRcC(O)NRcRd, NRcC(O)ORa, C(=NRi)NRcRd, NRcC(=NRi)NRcRd, S(O)Rb, S(O)NRcRd, S(O)2Rb, NRcS(O)2Rb, and S(O)2NRcRd. In some embodiments, Z is aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, or heterocycloalkyl, each optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, 10 C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, NO2, ORa, SRa, C(O)Rb, C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, OC(O)Rb, OC(O)NRcRd, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, NRcC(O)NRcRd, NRcC(O)ORa, C(=NRi)NRcRd, NRcC(=NRi)NRcRd, S(O)Rb, S(O)NRcRd, S(O)2Rb, NRcS(O)2Rb, and S(O)2NRcRd. In some embodiments, Z is aryl or heteroaryl, each optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, 15 C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, NO2, ORa, SRa, C(O)Rb, C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, OC(O)Rb, OC(O)NRcRd, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, NRcC(O)NRcRd, NRcC(O)ORa, C(=NRi)NRcRd, NRcC(=NRi)NRcRd, S(O)Rb, S(O)NRcRd, S(O)2Rb, NRcS(O)2Rb, and S(O)2NRcRd. In some embodiments, Z is aryl or heteroaryl, each optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, 20 C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, NO2, ORa, SRa, C(O)Rb, C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, OC(O)Rb, OC(O)NRcRd, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, NRcC(O)NRcRd, NRcC(O)ORa, C(=NRi)NRcRd, NRcC(=NRi)NRcRd, S(O)Rb, S(O)NRcRd, S(O)2Rb, NRcS(O)2Rb, and S(O)2NRcRd. In some embodiments, Z is phenyl or 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, each optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, 25 C1-4 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, NO2, ORa, SRa, C(O)Rb, C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, OC(O)Rb, OC(O)NRcRd, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, NRcC(O)NRcRd, NRcC(O)ORa, C(=NRi)NRcRd, NRcC(=NRi)NRcRd, S(O)Rb, S(O)NRcRd, S(O)2Rb, NRcS(O)2Rb, and S(O)2NRcRd. In some embodiments, Z is phenyl or 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, each optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, 30 C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, NO2, ORa, SRa, C(O)Rb, C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, OC(O)Rb, OC(O)NRcRd, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, NRcC(O)NRcRd, NRcC(O)ORa, C(=NRi)NRcRd, NRcC(=NRi)NRcRd, S(O)Rb, S(O)NRcRd, S(O)2Rb, NRcS(O)2Rb, and S(O)2NRcRd. In some embodiments, Z is phenyl optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, C1-4 hydroxy-35 alkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, NO2, ORa, SRa, C(O)Rb, C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, OC(O)Rb, OC(O)NRcRd, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, NRcC(O)NRcRd, NRcC(O)ORa, C(=NRi)NRcRd, NRcC(=NRi)NRcRd, S(O)Rb, S(O)NRcRd, S(O)2Rb, NRcS(O)2Rb, and S(O)2NRcRd. 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 In some embodiments, Z is phenyl optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, NO2, ORa, SRa, C(O)Rb, C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, OC(O)Rb, OC(O)NRcRd, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, NRcC(O)NRcRd, NRcC(O)ORa, C(=NRi)NRcRd, NRcC(=NRi)NRcRd, S(O)Rb, 5   S(O)NRcRd, S(O)2Rb, NRcS(O)2Rb, and S(O)2NRcRd. In some embodiments, Z is cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl, each optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, NO2, ORa, SRa, C(O)Rb, C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, OC(O)Rb, OC(O)NRcRd, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, NRcC(O)NRcRd, NRcC(O)ORa, 10   C(=NRi)NRcRd, NRcC(=NRi)NRcRd, S(O)Rb, S(O)NRcRd, S(O)2Rb, NRcS(O)2Rb, and S(O)2NRcRd. In some embodiments, Z is cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl, each optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, NO2, ORa, SRa, C(O)Rb, C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, OC(O)Rb, OC(O)NRcRd, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, NRcC(O)NRcRd, NRcC(O)ORa, C(=NRi)NRcRd, 15   NRcC(=NRi)NRcRd, S(O)Rb, S(O)NRcRd, S(O)2Rb, NRcS(O)2Rb, and S(O)2NRcRd. In some embodiments, Z is cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, or cycloheptyl, each optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, NO2, ORa, SRa, C(O)Rb, C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, OC(O)Rb, OC(O)NRcRd, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, 20   NRcC(O)NRcRd, NRcC(O)ORa, C(=NRi)NRcRd, NRcC(=NRi)NRcRd, S(O)Rb, S(O)NRcRd, S(O)2Rb, NRcS(O)2Rb, and S(O)2NRcRd. In some embodiments, Z is C1-8 alkyl, C2-8 alkenyl, or C2-8 alkynyl, each optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, NO2, ORa, SRa, C(O)Rb, 25   C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, OC(O)Rb, OC(O)NRcRd, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, NRcC(O)NRcRd, NRcC(O)ORa, C(=NRi)NRcRd, NRcC(=NRi)NRcRd, S(O)Rb, S(O)NRcRd, S(O)2Rb, NRcS(O)2Rb, and S(O)2NRcRd. In some embodiments, Z is C1-8 alkyl, C2-8 alkenyl, or C2-8 alkynyl, each optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, NO2, ORa, SRa, C(O)Rb, C(O)NRcRd, 30   C(O)ORa, OC(O)Rb, OC(O)NRcRd, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, NRcC(O)NRcRd, NRcC(O)ORa, C(=NRi)NRcRd, NRcC(=NRi)NRcRd, S(O)Rb, S(O)NRcRd, S(O)2Rb, NRcS(O)2Rb, and S(O)2NRcRd. In some embodiments, Z is aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, or heterocycloalkyl, each optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents independently selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, NO2, 35   ORa, SRa, C(O)Rb, C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, OC(O)Rb, OC(O)NRcRd, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, NRcC(O)NRcRd, NRcC(O)ORa, S(O)Rb, S(O)NRcRd, S(O)2Rb, NRcS(O)2Rb, and S(O)2NRcRd. 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 In some embodiments, Z is aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, or heterocycloalkyl, each optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents independently selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, NO2, ORa, SRa, C(O)Rb, C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, OC(O)Rb, OC(O)NRcRd, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, NRcC(O)NRcRd, 5   NRcC(O)ORa, S(O)Rb, S(O)NRcRd, S(O)2Rb, NRcS(O)2Rb, and S(O)2NRcRd. In some embodiments, Z is aryl or heteroaryl, each optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents independently selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, NO2, ORa, SRa, C(O)Rb, C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, OC(O)Rb, OC(O)NRcRd, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, NRcC(O)NRcRd, NRcC(O)ORa, S(O)Rb, 10   S(O)NRcRd, S(O)2Rb, NRcS(O)2Rb, and S(O)2NRcRd. In some embodiments, Z is aryl or heteroaryl, each optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents independently selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, NO2, ORa, SRa, C(O)Rb, C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, OC(O)Rb, OC(O)NRcRd, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, NRcC(O)NRcRd, NRcC(O)ORa, S(O)Rb, S(O)NRcRd, 15   S(O)2Rb, NRcS(O)2Rb, and S(O)2NRcRd. In some embodiments, Z is phenyl or 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, each optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents independently selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, NO2, ORa, SRa, C(O)Rb, C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, OC(O)Rb, OC(O)NRcRd, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, 20   NRcC(O)NRcRd, NRcC(O)ORa, S(O)Rb, S(O)NRcRd, S(O)2Rb, NRcS(O)2Rb, and S(O)2NRcRd. In some embodiments, Z is phenyl or 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, each optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents independently selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, NO2, ORa, SRa, C(O)Rb, C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, OC(O)Rb, OC(O)NRcRd, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, NRcC(O)NRcRd, 25   NRcC(O)ORa, S(O)Rb, S(O)NRcRd, S(O)2Rb, NRcS(O)2Rb, and S(O)2NRcRd. In some embodiments, Z is phenyl optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents independently selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, NO2, ORa, SRa, C(O)Rb, C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, OC(O)Rb, OC(O)NRcRd, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, NRcC(O)NRcRd, NRcC(O)ORa, S(O)Rb, S(O)NRcRd, 30   S(O)2Rb, NRcS(O)2Rb, and S(O)2NRcRd. In some embodiments, Z is phenyl optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents independently selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, NO2, ORa, SRa, C(O)Rb, C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, OC(O)Rb, OC(O)NRcRd, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, NRcC(O)NRcRd, NRcC(O)ORa, S(O)Rb, S(O)NRcRd, S(O)2Rb, 35   NRcS(O)2Rb, and S(O)2NRcRd. In some embodiments, Z is cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl, each optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents independently selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, NO2, ORa, SRa, C(O)Rb, C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, OC(O)Rb, OC(O)NRcRd, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, NRcC(O)NRcRd, NRcC(O)ORa, S(O)Rb, S(O)NRcRd, S(O)2Rb, NRcS(O)2Rb, and S(O)2NRcRd. In some embodiments, Z is cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl, each optionally substituted with 1, 5    2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents independently selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, NO2, ORa, SRa, C(O)Rb, C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, OC(O)Rb, OC(O)NRcRd, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, NRcC(O)NRcRd, NRcC(O)ORa, S(O)Rb, S(O)NRcRd, S(O)2Rb, NRcS(O)2Rb, and S(O)2NRcRd. In some embodiments, Z is C1-8 alkyl, C2-8 alkenyl, or C2-8 alkynyl, each optionally substituted 10 with 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents independently selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, NO2, ORa, SRa, C(O)Rb, C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, OC(O)Rb, OC(O)NRcRd, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, NRcC(O)NRcRd, NRcC(O)ORa, S(O)Rb, S(O)NRcRd, S(O)2Rb, NRcS(O)2Rb, and S(O)2NRcRd. In some embodiments, Z is C1-8 alkyl, C2-8 alkenyl, or C2-8 alkynyl, each optionally substituted 15 with 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents independently selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, NO2, ORa, SRa, C(O)Rb, C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, OC(O)Rb, OC(O)NRcRd, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, NRcC(O)NRcRd, NRcC(O)ORa, S(O)Rb, S(O)NRcRd, S(O)2Rb, NRcS(O)2Rb, and S(O)2NRcRd. In some embodiments, Z is C1-8 alkyl, C2-8 alkenyl, C2-8 alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, 20 or heterocycloalkyl, each optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents independently selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, NO2, ORa, C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, and S(O)2Rb. In some embodiments, Z is C1-8 alkyl, C2-8 alkenyl, C2-8 alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, or heterocycloalkyl, each optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents independently 25 selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, NO2, ORa, C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, and S(O)2Rb. In some embodiments, Z is C1-8 alkyl, C2-8 alkenyl, C2-8 alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, or heterocycloalkyl, each optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituents independently selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, NO2, 30   ORa, C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, and S(O)2Rb. In some embodiments, Z is C1-8 alkyl, C2-8 alkenyl, C2-8 alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, or heterocycloalkyl, each optionally substituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituents independently selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, NO2, ORa, C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, and S(O)2Rb. 35           In some embodiments, Z is substituted with at least one substituent comprising at least one CN group. 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 In some embodiments, Z is C1-8 alkyl, C2-8 alkenyl, C2-8 alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, or heterocycloalkyl, each substituted with at least one CN or C1-4 cyanoalkyl and optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 further substituents selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, NO2, ORa, SRa, 5   C(O)Rb, C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, OC(O)Rb, OC(O)NRcRd, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, NRcC(O)NRcRd, NRcC(O)ORa, S(O)Rb, S(O)NRcRd, S(O)2Rb, NRcS(O)2Rb, and S(O)2NRcRd. In some embodiments, Z is C1-8 alkyl, C2-8 alkenyl, C2-8 alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, or heterocycloalkyl, each substituted with at least one CN or C1-4 cyanoalkyl and optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 further substituents selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 10 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, NO2, ORa, SRa, C(O)Rb, C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, OC(O)Rb, OC(O)NRcRd, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, NRcC(O)NRcRd, NRcC(O)ORa, S(O)Rb, S(O)NRcRd, S(O)2Rb, NRcS(O)2Rb, and S(O)2NRcRd. In some embodiments, wherein the -(Y)n-Z moiety is taken together with i) A2 to which said moiety is attached, ii) R5 or R6 of either T or V, and iii) the C or N atom to which said R5 or R6 of 15 either T or V is attached to form a 4- to 20-membered aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, or heterocycloalkyl ring fused to the 5-membered ring formed by A1, A2, U, T, and V, wherein said 4- to 20-membered aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, or heterocycloalkyl ring is optionally substituted by 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 substituents independently selected from -(W)m-Q. In some embodiments, wherein the -(Y)n-Z moiety is taken together with i) A2 to which said 20 moiety is attached, ii) R5 or R6 of either T or V, and iii) the C or N atom to which said R5 or R6 of either T or V is attached to form a 4- to 8-membered aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, or heterocycloalkyl ring fused to the 5-membered ring formed by A1, A2, U, T, and V, wherein said 4- to 8-membered aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, or heterocycloalkyl ring is optionally substituted by 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 substituents independently selected from -(W)m-Q. 25           In some embodiments, the -(Y)n-Z moiety is taken together with i) A2 to which said moiety is attached, ii) R5 or R6 of either T or V, and iii) the C or N atom to which said R5 or R6 of either T or V is attached to form a 6-membered aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, or heterocycloalkyl ring fused to the 5membered ring formed by A1, A2, U, T, and V, wherein said 6-membered aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, or heterocycloalkyl ring is optionally substituted by 1, 2, or 3 substituents independently selected 30 from halo, CN, NO2, C1-8 alkyl, C2-8 alkenyl, C2-8 alkynyl, C1-8 haloalkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, or heterocycloalkyl wherein said C1-8 alkyl, C2-8 alkenyl, C2-8 alkynyl, C1-8 haloalkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, or heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted by 1, 2 or 3 CN. In some embodiments, Cy1 and Cy2 are independently selected from aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, and heterocycloalkyl, each optionally substituted by 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 substituents 35 independently selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, CN, NO2, ORa’’, SRa’’, C(O)Rb’’, C(O)NRc’’Rd’’, C(O)ORa’’, OC(O)Rb’’, 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 OC(O)NRc’’Rd’’, NRc’’Rd’’, NRc’’C(O)Rb’’, NRc’’C(O)ORa’’, S(O)Rb’’, S(O)NRc’’Rd’’, S(O)2Rb’’, and S(O)2NRc’’Rd’’. In some embodiments, Cy1 and Cy2 are independently selected from aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, and heterocycloalkyl, each optionally substituted by 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 substituents 5 independently selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, CN, NO2, ORa’’, SRa’’, C(O)Rb’’, C(O)NRc’’Rd’’, C(O)ORa’’, OC(O)Rb’’, OC(O)NRc’’Rd’’, NRc’’Rd’’, NRc’’C(O)Rb’’, NRc’’C(O)ORa’’, S(O)Rb’’, S(O)NRc’’Rd’’, S(O)2Rb’’, and S(O)2NRc’’Rd’’. In some embodiments, Cy1 and Cy2 are independently selected from cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl, each optionally substituted by 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 substituents independently selected 10 from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, CN, NO2, ORa’’, SRa’’, C(O)Rb’’, C(O)NRc’’Rd’’, C(O)ORa’’, OC(O)Rb’’, OC(O)NRc’’Rd’’, NRc’’Rd’’, NRc’’C(O)Rb’’, NRc’’C(O)ORa’’, S(O)Rb’’, S(O)NRc’’Rd’’, S(O)2Rb’’, and S(O)2NRc’’Rd’’. In some embodiments, Cy1 and Cy2 are independently selected from cycloalkyl optionally substituted by 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 substituents independently selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-15    4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, CN, NO2, ORa’’, SRa’’, C(O)Rb’’, C(O)NRc’’Rd’’, C(O)ORa’’, OC(O)Rb’’, OC(O)NRc’’Rd’’, NRc’’Rd’’, NRc’’C(O)Rb’’, NRc’’C(O)ORa’’, S(O)Rb’’, S(O)NRc’’Rd’’, S(O)2Rb’’, and S(O)2NRc’’Rd’’. In some embodiments, R1, R2, R3, and R4 are independently selected from H, halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, CN, NO2, OR7, 20   SR7, C(O)R8, C(O)NR9R10, C(O)OR7 OC(O)R8, OC(O)NR9R10, NR9R10, NR9C(O)R8, NRcC(O)OR7, S(O)R8, S(O)NR9R10, S(O)2R8, NR9S(O)2R8, and S(O)2NR9R10. In some embodiments, R1, R2, R3, and R4 are independently selected from H, halo, and C1-4 alkyl. In some embodiments, R1, R2, R3, and R4 are each H. 25           In some embodiments, R1 is H, halo, or C1-4 alkyl. In some embodiments, R5 is H, halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, CN, NO2, OR7, SR7, C(O)R8, C(O)NR9R10, C(O)OR7, OC(O)R8, OC(O)NR9R10, NR9R10, NR9C(O)R8, NR9C(O)OR7, S(O)R8, S(O)NR9R10, S(O)2R8, NR9S(O)2R8, or S(O)2NR9R10. In some embodiments, R5 is H, halo, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, CN, or NR9R10. 30           In some embodiments, R5 is H, halo, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, CN, or NR9R10. In some embodiments, R5 is H. In some embodiments, R6 is H or C1-4 alkyl. In some embodiments, R6 is H. In some embodiments, R11 and R12 are independently selected from H, halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 35 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, NO2, ORa, SRa, C(O)Rb, C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, OC(O)Rb, OC(O)NRcRd, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, NRcC(O)NRcRd, NRcC(O)ORa, C(=NRi)NRcRd, NRcC(=NRi)NRcRd, S(O)Rb, S(O)NRcRd, S(O)2Rb, 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 NRcS(O)2Rb, C(=NOH)Rb, C(=NO(C1-6 alkyl)Rb, and S(O)2NRcRd, wherein said C1-8 alkyl, C2-8 alkenyl, or C2-8 alkynyl, is optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 substituents independently selected from halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cy1, CN, NO2, ORa, SRa, C(O)Rb, C(O)NRcRd, C(O)ORa, OC(O)Rb, 5   OC(O)NRcRd, NRcRd, NRcC(O)Rb, NRcC(O)NRcRd, NRcC(O)ORa, C(=NRi)NRcRd, NRcC(=NRi)NRcRd, S(O)Rb, S(O)NRcRd, S(O)2Rb, NRcS(O)2Rb, C(=NOH)Rb, C(=NO(C1-6 alkyl))Rb, and S(O)2NRcRd. In some embodiments, R11 and R12 are independently selected from H, halo, OH, CN, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, halosulfanyl, SCN, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, 10 aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, and heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R11 and R12 are independently selected from H, halo, OH, CN, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, and heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, the compound has Formula Ia or Ib: 15 (Y)n-Z (Y)n-Z In some embodiments, the compound has Formula II: II. 20 In some embodiments, the compound has Formula IIIa or IIIb: (Y)n-Z (Y)n-Z 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 IIIa IIIb. In some embodiments, the compound has Formula IV: IV. In some embodiments, the compound has Formula Va: CN 10 In some embodiments, the compound has Formula Vb: CN N—N Vb. 15 In some embodiments, the compound has Formula VIa: 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 In some embodiments, the compound has Formula VIb: VIb. At various places in the present specification, substituents of compounds of the invention are disclosed in groups or in ranges. It is specifically intended that the invention include each and every 10 individual subcombination of the members of such groups and ranges. For example, the term “C1-6 alkyl” is specifically intended to individually disclose methyl, ethyl, C3 alkyl, C4 alkyl, C5 alkyl, and C6 alkyl. It is further appreciated that certain features of the invention, which are, for clarity, described in the context of separate embodiments, can also be provided in combination in a single embodiment. 15 Conversely, various features of the invention which are, for brevity, described in the context of a single embodiment, can also be provided separately or in any suitable subcombination. At various places in the present specification, linking substituents are described. It is specifically intended that each linking substituent include both the forward and backward forms of the linking substituent. For example, -NR(CR’R’’)n- includes both NR(CR’R’’)n and -(CR’R’’)nNR-. 20 Where the structure clearly requires a linking group, the Markush variables listed for that group are understood to be linking groups. For example, if the structure requires a linking group and the Markush group definition for that variable lists “alkyl” or “aryl” then it is understood that the “alkyl” or “aryl” represents a linking alkylene group or arylene group, respectively. The term “n-membered” where n is an integer typically describes the number of ring-forming 25 atoms in a moiety where the number of ring-forming atoms is n. For example, piperidinyl is an 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 example of a 6-membered heterocycloalkyl ring and 1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-naphthalene is an example of a 10-membered cycloalkyl group. As used herein, the term “alkyl” is meant to refer to a saturated hydrocarbon group which is straight-chained or branched. Example alkyl groups include methyl (Me), ethyl (Et), propyl (e.g., n- 5 propyl and isopropyl), butyl (e.g., n-butyl, isobutyl, t-butyl), pentyl (e.g., n-pentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl), and the like. An alkyl group can contain from 1 to about 20, from 2 to about 20, from 1 to about 10, from 1 to about 8, from 1 to about 6, from 1 to about 4, or from 1 to about 3 carbon atoms. A linking alkyl group is referred to herein as “alkylene.” As used herein, “alkenyl” refers to an alkyl group having one or more double carbon-carbon 10 bonds. Example alkenyl groups include ethenyl, propenyl, cyclohexenyl, and the like. A linking alkenyl group is referred to herein as “alkenylene.” As used herein, “alkynyl” refers to an alkyl group having one or more triple carbon-carbon bonds. Example alkynyl groups include ethynyl, propynyl, and the like. A linking alkynyl group is referred to herein as “alkynylene.” 15           As used herein, “haloalkyl” refers to an alkyl group having one or more halogen substituents. Example haloalkyl groups include CF3, C2F5, CHF2, CCl3, CHCl2, C2Cl5, and the like. As used herein, “halosulfanyl” refers to a sulfur group having one or more halogen substituents. Example halosulfanyl groups include pentahalosulfanyl groups such as SF5. As used herein, “aryl” refers to monocyclic or polycyclic (e.g., having 2, 3 or 4 fused rings) 20 aromatic hydrocarbons such as, for example, phenyl, naphthyl, anthracenyl, phenanthrenyl, indanyl, indenyl, and the like. In some embodiments, aryl groups have from 6 to about 20 carbon atoms. A linking aryl group is referred to herein as “arylene.” As used herein, “cycloalkyl” refers to non-aromatic cyclic hydrocarbons including cyclized alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl groups. Cycloalkyl groups can include mono- or polycyclic (e.g., having 2, 25   3 or 4 fused rings) groups and spirocycles. Ring-forming carbon atoms of a cycloalkyl group can be optionally substituted by oxo or sulfido. Cycloalkyl groups also include cycloalkylidenes. Example cycloalkyl groups include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, cyclopentenyl, cyclohexenyl, cyclohexadienyl, cycloheptatrienyl, norbornyl, norpinyl, norcarnyl, adamantyl, and the like. Also included in the definition of cycloalkyl are moieties that have one or 30 more aromatic rings fused (i.e., having a bond in common with) to the cycloalkyl ring, for example, benzo or thienyl derivatives of pentane, pentene, hexane, and the like. A cycloalkyl group containing a fused aromatic ring can be attached through any ring-forming atom including a ring-forming atom of the fused aromatic ring. A linking cycloalkyl group is referred to herein as “cycloalkylene.” As used herein, “heteroaryl” refers to an aromatic heterocycle having at least one heteroatom 35 ring member such as sulfur, oxygen, or nitrogen. Heteroaryl groups include monocyclic and polycyclic (e.g., having 2, 3 or 4 fused rings) systems. Examples of heteroaryl groups include without limitation, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, pyridazinyl, triazinyl, furyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, thienyl, 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 imidazolyl, thiazolyl, indolyl, pyrryl, oxazolyl, benzofuryl, benzothienyl, benzthiazolyl, isoxazolyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, indazolyl, 1,2,4-thiadiazolyl, isothiazolyl, benzothienyl, purinyl, carbazolyl, benzimidazolyl, indolinyl, and the like. In some embodiments, the heteroaryl group has from 1 to about 20 carbon atoms, and in further embodiments from about 3 to about 20 carbon atoms. 5 In some embodiments, the heteroaryl group contains 3 to about 14, 4 to about 14, 3 to about 7, or 5 to 6 ring-forming atoms. In some embodiments, the heteroaryl group has 1 to about 4, 1 to about 3, or 1 to 2 heteroatoms. A linking heteroaryl group is referred to herein as “heteroarylene.” As used herein, “heterocycloalkyl” refers to non-aromatic heterocycles including cyclized alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl groups where one or more of the ring-forming carbon atoms is replaced by 10 a heteroatom such as an O, N, or S atom. Heterocycloalkyl groups include monocyclic and polycyclic (e.g., having 2, 3 or 4 fused rings) systems as well as spirocycles. Example “heterocycloalkyl” groups include morpholino, thiomorpholino, piperazinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydrothienyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzofuryl, 1,3-benzodioxole, benzo-1,4-dioxane, piperidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, isoxazolidinyl, isothiazolidinyl, pyrazolidinyl, oxazolidinyl, thiazolidinyl, imidazolidinyl, and the like. Ring-forming 15 carbon atoms and heteroatoms of a heterocycloalkyl group can be optionally substituted by oxo or sulfido. Also included in the definition of heterocycloalkyl are moieties that have one or more aromatic rings fused (i.e., having a bond in common with) to the nonaromatic heterocyclic ring, for example phthalimidyl, naphthalimidyl, and benzo derivatives of heterocycles. The heterocycloalkyl group can be attached through a ring-forming carbon atom or a ring-forming heteroatom. The 20 heterocycloalkyl group containing a fused aromatic ring can be attached through any ring-forming atom including a ring-forming atom of the fused aromatic ring. In some embodiments, the heterocycloalkyl group has from 1 to about 20 carbon atoms, and in further embodiments from about 3 to about 20 carbon atoms. In some embodiments, the heterocycloalkyl group contains 3 to about 14, 4 to about 14, 3 to about 7, or 5 to 6 ring-forming atoms. In some embodiments, the heterocycloalkyl 25 group has 1 to about 4, 1 to about 3, or 1 to 2 heteroatoms. In some embodiments, the heterocycloalkyl group contains 0 to 3 double or triple bonds. In some embodiments, the heterocycloalkyl group contains 0 to 2 double or triple bonds. A linking heterocycloalkyl group is referred to herein as “heterocycloalkylene.” As used herein, “halo” or “halogen” includes fluoro, chloro, bromo, and iodo. 30           As used herein, “arylalkyl” refers to alkyl substituted by aryl and “cycloalkylalkyl” refers to alkyl substituted by cycloalkyl. An example arylalkyl group is benzyl. As used herein, “heteroarylalkyl” refers to alkyl substituted by heteroaryl and “heterocycloalkylalkyl” refers to alkyl substituted by heterocycloalkyl. As used herein, “amino” refers to NH2. 35           As used herein, “alkylamino” refers to an amino group substituted by an alkyl group. As used herein, “dialkylamino” refers to an amino group substituted by two alkyl groups. As used herein, “hydroxylalkyl” refers to an alkyl group substituted by hydroxyl. 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 As used herein, “cyanoalkyl” refers to an alkyl group substituted by cyano. The carbon of the cyano group is typically not counted if a carbon count precedes the term. For example, cyanomethyl is considered herein to be a C1 cyanoalkyl group. The compounds described herein can be asymmetric (e.g., having one or more stereocenters). 5 All stereoisomers, such as enantiomers and diastereomers, are intended unless otherwise indicated. Compounds of the present invention that contain asymmetrically substituted carbon atoms can be isolated in optically active or racemic forms. Methods on how to prepare optically active forms from optically active starting materials are known in the art, such as by resolution of racemic mixtures or by stereoselective synthesis. Many geometric isomers of olefins, C=N double bonds, and the like can 10 also be present in the compounds described herein, and all such stable isomers are contemplated in the present invention. Cis and trans geometric isomers of the compounds of the present invention are described and may be isolated as a mixture of isomers or as separated isomeric forms. Resolution of racemic mixtures of compounds can be carried out by any of numerous methods known in the art. An example method includes fractional recrystallizaion using a chiral resolving acid 15 which is an optically active, salt-forming organic acid. Suitable resolving agents for fractional recrystallization methods are, for example, optically active acids, such as the D and L forms of tartaric acid, diacetyltartaric acid, dibenzoyltartaric acid, mandelic acid, malic acid, lactic acid or the various optically active camphorsulfonic acids such as p-camphorsulfonic acid. Other resolving agents suitable for fractional crystallization methods include stereoisomerically pure forms of a-methyl- 20 benzylamine (e.g., S and R forms, or diastereomerically pure forms), 2-phenylglycinol, norephedrine, ephedrine, N-methylephedrine, cyclohexylethylamine, 1,2-diaminocyclohexane, and the like. Resolution of racemic mixtures can also be carried out by elution on a column packed with an optically active resolving agent (e.g., dinitrobenzoylphenylglycine). Suitable elution solvent composition can be determined by one skilled in the art. 25           Compounds of the invention also include tautomeric forms. Tautomeric forms result from the swapping of a single bond with an adjacent double bond together with the concomitant migration of a proton. Tautomeric forms include prototropic tautomers which are isomeric protonation states having the same empirical formula and total charge. Example prototropic tautomers include ketone - enol pairs, amide - imidic acid pairs, lactam - lactim pairs, amide - imidic acid pairs, enamine - imine 30 pairs, and annular forms where a proton can occupy two or more positions of a heterocyclic system, for example, 1H- and 3H-imidazole, 1H-, 2H- and 4H- 1,2,4-triazole, 1H- and 2H- isoindole, and 1H-and 2H-pyrazole. Tautomeric forms can be in equilibrium or sterically locked into one form by appropriate substitution. Compounds of the invention further include hydrates and solvates, as well as anhydrous and 35 non-solvated forms. 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 Compounds of the invention can also include all isotopes of atoms occurring in the intermediates or final compounds. Isotopes include those atoms having the same atomic number but different mass numbers. For example, isotopes of hydrogen include tritium and deuterium. In some embodiments, the compounds of the invention, and salts thereof, are substantially 5 isolated. By “substantially isolated” is meant that the compound is at least partially or substantially separated from the environment in which is was formed or detected. Partial separation can include, for example, a composition enriched in the compound of the invention. Substantial separation can include compositions containing at least about 50%, at least about 60%, at least about 70%, at least about 80%, at least about 90%, at least about 95%, at least about 97%, or at least about 99% by 10 weight of the compound of the invention, or salt thereof. Methods for isolating compounds and their salts are routine in the art. The expressions, “ambient temperature” and “room temperature,” as used herein, are understood in the art, and refer generally to a temperature, e.g a reaction temperature, that is about the temperature of the room in which the reaction is carried out, for example, a temperature from about 15   20 °C to about 30 °C. The phrase "pharmaceutically acceptable" is employed herein to refer to those compounds, materials, compositions, and / or dosage forms which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of human beings and animals without excessive toxicity, irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication, commensurate with a reasonable 20 benefit / risk ratio. The present invention also includes pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the compounds described herein. As used herein, "pharmaceutically acceptable salts" refers to derivatives of the disclosed compounds wherein the parent compound is modified by converting an existing acid or base moiety to its salt form. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, but are not limited to, 25 mineral or organic acid salts of basic residues such as amines; alkali or organic salts of acidic residues such as carboxylic acids; and the like. The pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the present invention include the conventional non-toxic salts of the parent compound formed, for example, from non-toxic inorganic or organic acids. The pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the present invention can be synthesized from the parent compound which contains a basic or acidic moiety by conventional 30 chemical methods. Generally, such salts can be prepared by reacting the free acid or base forms of these compounds with a stoichiometric amount of the appropriate base or acid in water or in an organic solvent, or in a mixture of the two; generally, nonaqueous media like ether, ethyl acetate, ethanol, isopropanol, or acetonitrile (MeCN) are preferred. Lists of suitable salts are found in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 17th ed., Mack Publishing Company, Easton, Pa., 1985, p. 35    1418 and Journal of Pharmaceutical Science, 66, 1 (1977), each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. For example, some of the suitable salts include fumarate salts, hydrochloride salts, phosphate salts, maleate salts, mesylate salts, and sulfate salts. 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 The present invention also includes prodrugs of the compounds described herein. As used herein, “prodrugs” refer to any covalently bonded carriers which release the active parent drug when administered to a mammalian subject. Prodrugs can be prepared by modifying functional groups present in the compounds in such a way that the modifications are cleaved, either in routine 5 manipulation or in vivo, to the parent compounds. Prodrugs include compounds wherein hydroxyl, amino, sulfhydryl, or carboxyl groups are bonded to any group that, when administered to a mammalian subject, cleaves to form a free hydroxyl, amino, sulfhydryl, or carboxyl group respectively. Examples of prodrugs include, but are not limited to, acetate, formate and benzoate derivatives of alcohol and amine functional groups in the compounds of the invention. Preparation 10 and use of prodrugs is discussed in T. Higuchi and V. Stella, "Pro-drugs as Novel Delivery Systems," Vol. 14 of the A.C.S. Symposium Series, and in Bioreversible Carriers in Drug Design, ed. Edward B. Roche, American Pharmaceutical Association and Pergamon Press, 1987, both of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety. 15 Synthesis Compounds of the invention, including salts thereof, can be prepared using known organic synthesis techniques and can be synthesized according to any of numerous possible synthetic routes. The reactions for preparing compounds of the invention can be carried out in suitable solvents which can be readily selected by one of skill in the art of organic synthesis. Suitable solvents can be 20 substantially nonreactive with the starting materials (reactants), the intermediates, or products at the temperatures at which the reactions are carried out, e.g., temperatures which can range from the solvent's freezing temperature to the solvent's boiling temperature. A given reaction can be carried out in one solvent or a mixture of more than one solvent. Depending on the particular reaction step, suitable solvents for a particular reaction step can be selected by the skilled artisan. 25           Preparation of compounds of the invention can involve the protection and deprotection of various chemical groups. The need for protection and deprotection, and the selection of appropriate protecting groups, can be readily determined by one skilled in the art. The chemistry of protecting groups can be found, for example, in T.W. Green and P.G.M. Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 3rd. Ed., Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York (1999), which is incorporated herein by reference 30 in its entirety. Reactions can be monitored according to any suitable method known in the art. For example, product formation can be monitored by spectroscopic means, such as nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy (e.g., 1H or 13C) infrared spectroscopy, spectrophotometry (e.g., UV-visible), or mass spectrometry, or by chromatography such as high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) or thin 35 layer chromatography. 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 Compounds of the invention can be prepared according to numerous preparatory routes known in the literature. Example synthetic methods for preparing compounds of the invention are provided in the Schemes below. As shown in Scheme 1, pyrazole-containing cores 1-9 and 1-6 can be synthesized starting 5 with pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine or pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyrimidine 1-1. The compound 1-1 can be converted to an active species such as an N-oxide analog (1-2) by using an oxidant such as m-CPBA. The N-oxide 1-2 can be halogenated with a halogenating agent such as a combination of tetramethylammonium bromide and methanesulfonic anhydride to form a 4-halo compound 1-3 such as a 4-bromo compound while the N-oxide is reduced at the same time. The amine group of the compound 1-3 can be 10 protected by a suitable amine protecting group to afford the protected compound 1-7, which subsequently undergoes a Suzuki coupling with a boric acid 1-8 to afford the pyrazole-containing cores 1-9a which can be further reacted with reagent L-(Y)n-Z (where L is a leaving group) to give compounds of the invention 1-9b. Alternatively, the N-oxide 1-2 can be halogenated with a halogenating agent such as MeSO2Cl to form a 4-halo compound 1-4 such as a 4-chloro compound 15 while the N-oxide is reduced at the same time. The 4-halo compound 1-4 can be coupled to a bromosubstituted pyrazole compound 1-5 under suitable conditions such as heating to afford the pyrazole-containing core 1-6, which may contain some functional groups such as bromo or cyano suitable for further chemical modification. Similarly, an imidazole core 1-11 can be synthesized by coupling of the 4-halo compound 1-4 20 to an imidazole derivative 1-10 under suitable conditions such as heating to afford the imidazole-containing core 1-11, which may contain some functional groups such as bromo or cyano suitable for further chemical modification. 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 Scheme 1 As shown in Scheme 2, pyrazole-containing cores 2-3, 2-5 and 2-6 can be synthesized starting with a bromo-substituted pyrazole derivative 2-1 (a compound 1-6 in Scheme 1 wherein one of R5 is Br). The bromo-substituted pyrazole derivative 2-1 can be coupled to boron-containing aromatic 5 species such as an aromatic boric acid 2-2 using Suzuki coupling wherein Ar is aryl or heteroaryl, each of which can be optionally substituted by one or more substituents such as alky, aryl, CN, nitro, alkoxy, etc. Alternatively, an alkene- or alkyne-containing compound such as an alkene-containing 25 can be obtained by coupling the bromo-substituted pyrazole derivative 2-1 to an unsaturated compound such as an alkene 2-4 in the presence of a metal catalyst such as bis(triphenylphos-10 phine)palladium (II) chloride wherein t can be 0, 1, 2, and the like; and R can be a substituent such as alkyl, aryl, CN, nitro, alkoxy, etc. The alkene group of compound 2-5 can be reduced by hydrogenation to afford the corresponding compound 2-6. 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 Scheme 2 R5     Br "A N^^R5             Ar-B(OH)2 2-2 I R1             ______________________________, X              2            Suzuki 11 I / R2               coupling R3^N^ N H reduction As shown in Scheme 3, imidazole-containing cores 3-7 can be synthesized starting with an N-protected 4-bromo-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine or an N-protected 4-bromo-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyrimidine 3-1 5 wherein P is a suitable amine protecting group such as {[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl} (SEM). Compound 3-1 can be reacted with a Grignard reagent such as isopropyl magnesium chloride to generate an aromatic anion through ion exchange. The subsequent addition of a chloroacetylcontaining compound such as 2-chloro-N-methoxy-N-methylacetamide 3-2 to the anion will typically afford the chloroacetyl derivative 3-3. The derivative 3-3 can be reacted with an organic acid salt 10 such as a cesium salt R5CO2Cs to afford a compound 3-4. In the presence of a suitable ammonia source such as ammonium acetate, the compound 3-4 can react with ammonia under suitable conditions such as at a high temperature to form the imidazole ring of the compound 3-5. The free amine nitrogen of the imidazole derivative 3-5 can undergo further modification such as reacting with a compound X-(Y)n-Z where X is a leaving group such as chloro, bromo or iodo so as to afford 15 compound 3-6. The protecting group of compound 3-6 can be removed by an appropriate method according to the nature of the protecting group to yield compound 3-7. It should be noted that if there are functional groups present within the R, R5, and -(Y)n-Z group, further modification can be made. For example, a CN group can be hydrolyzed to afford an amide group; a carboxylic acid can be converted to a ester, which in turn can be further reduced to an alcohol, which in turn can be further 20 modified. One skilled in the art will recognize appropriate further modifications. 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 Scheme 3 Cl 3-2 R5 R3 X-(Y)n-Z P R3 P O R5-CO2Cs NH4OAc heat deprotection R3 As shown in Scheme 4, thiazole-containing cores 4-3 can be synthesized starting with an N-protected chloroacetyl derivative 4-1 wherein P is a suitable amine protecting group such as SEM. Compound 4-1 can be reacted with a thioamide 4-2 to form the thiazole ring, followed by 5 deprotection of the amine nitrogen of the pyrrole ring by removal of the P group to afford the compound 4-3. Various thioureas 4-5 (equivalent to compound 4-2 wherein -(Y)n-Z is NR’R’’; and R’ and R’’ are H, alkyl, aryl or the like; or R’ and R’’ together with the N atom to which they are attached form a heterocycloalkyl) useful in preparing the thiazole compounds 4-3 can be made from secondary amines 4-4. A secondary amine 4-4 can be reacted with 1,1’-thiocarbonyldiimidazole; and 10 the resulting intermediate can further be reacted with ammonia to afford a thiourea 4-5. Scheme 4 1) Im2CS                S H                         R'. A R'^NR"                      N NH2 A A       2) NH3 / MeOH         R'' A _ 4-4              3                      4-5 As shown in Scheme 5, thiazole-containing cores 5-5 can be synthesized starting with a thiazole compound 5-1. The compound 5-1 can be reacted with a metal alkyl such as n-butyl lithium via ion exchange to generate an aromatic anion in situ. The subsequent addition of boric acid 15 trimethyl ester followed by hydrolysis will typically afford the boric acid 5-2. The boric acid 5-2 can 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 undergo Suzuki coupling with an N-protected 4-bromo-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine or an N-protected 4-bromo-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyrimidine 5-3 wherein P is a suitable amine protecting group such as SEM. The protecting group P of the coupling product 5-4 can be removed by an appropriate method according to the nature of the protecting group to yield the compound of the invention 5-5. 5 Scheme 5 1. nBuLi, Hexanes 2. B(OMe)3 . Z (Y)n 5-1 B(OH)2 5-2 Pd(Ph3P)4 K2CO3 H2O / DMF heat deprotection As shown in Scheme 6, pyrazole-containing compounds 6-1 can further be modified by substitution on the pyrazole NH group with appropriate reagents. For example, a compound 6-1 10 wherein P is a suitable amine protecting group such as SEM can be reacted with L-(Y)n-Z where L represents a leaving group such as halo, triflate or the like to afford compound 6-2 under basic condition. If there are some functional groups present within the Y and / or Z group, further modification can be made. For example, a CN group can be hydrolyzed to afford an amide group; a carboxylic acid can be converted to a ester, which in turn can be further reduced to alcohol. One 15 skilled in the art will recognize the further modifications if appropriate. Additionally, compound 6-1 can be reacted with alkene 6-3 (wherein R’ and R” can be H, alkyl, cycloalkyl and the like; and Z’ can be an electron withdrawing group such as an ester or CN) to afford the compound 6-4. Further, substitution can be made on alkene 6-3 at the alpha position (alpha to Z’) to generate a substituted derivatives of product, 6-4 (see, e.g., Example 68). 20           Compounds 6-2 and 6-4 can be deprotected by appropriate methods according to the nature of the protecting group used to afford their corresponding de-protected counterpart. 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 6-1 Scheme 6 L-(Y)n-Z 6-2 6-4 As shown in Scheme 7, bromo pyrazole containing compounds 7-1 can be further modified by metallation with reagents like butyl lithium and reaction with electrophiles like aldehydes to give 5 the alcohol containing compounds 7-2 which can be deprotected to yield compounds of the invention having formula 7-3. One skilled in the art will recognize the further modifications where appropriate. Scheme 7 BuLi THF aldehyde ketone etc. 10          As shown in Scheme 8, pyrazole-containing compounds 8-4 and 8-5 can be prepared by reaction of the N-protected bromo compound 8-1 with hydrazine in an appropriate solvent such as N,N-dimethylformamide (DMF) to give the hydrazine intermediate 8-2. The hydrazino intermediate 8-2 is reacted with an appropriately substituted 1,3 bis-aldehyde like 8-3 to give the pyrazole containing compound 8-4. If there are some functional groups present within the Y and / or Z group, 15 further modification can be made. For example, a CN group can be hydrolyzed to afford an amide 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 10 15 group; a carboxylic acid can be converted to a ester, which in turn can be further reduced to alcohol. One skilled in the art will recognize further potential modifications. Scheme 8 As shown in Scheme 9, the 1,2,4-oxadiazole compound 9-6 can prepared from the N-protected bromo compound 9-1 by treatment with zinc cyanide in DMF in the presence of a catalyst like bis(tributyl) palladium to give the N-protected cyano compound 9-2. The N-hydroxy carbox-imidamide compound 9-3 can be prepared by heating the N-protected cyano compound 9-2 with hydroxylamine hydrochloride in an appropriate solvent like ethanol and a base like potassium carbonate at a temperature below the boiling point of the solvent. The N-protected 1,2,4-oxadiazole compound can be prepared by treating the N-hydroxy carboximidamide compound 9-3 with an appropriately substituted acid chloride compound 9-4 in a solvent like pyridine at a sufficient temperature to complete the ring closure. If there are some functional groups present within the Y and / or Z group, further modification can be made. For example, a CN group can be hydrolyzed to afford an amide group; a carboxylic acid can be converted to an ester, which in turn can be further reduced to alcohol. One skilled in the art will recognize further modifications where appropriate. Scheme 9 DMF ZnCN (Bu3P)2Pd NH2OH-HCl EtOH K2CO3 reflux 9-3 9-6 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 10 As shown in Scheme 10, the 3- and 4-arylpyrazolo compounds 10-9 can be prepared by reaction of the respective 3-arylpyrazolo compound 10-4 or 4-aryl pyrazolo compound 10-7 with an appropriately substituted bromo compound 10-8 as previously described. The 3-aryl pyrazolo compound 10-4 can be prepared by reacting an appropriately substituted aryl group containing a halogen like bromo or a triflate with the N-protected boronic acid or boronic acid ester pyrazole compound 10-2 under Suzuki-like conditions known in the literature. The N-protecting group of 10-3 can be removed by conditions previously described and known in the literature for removing groups like SEM. The 4-arylpyrazolo compounds 10-7 can be prepared by reacting the appropriately substituted acetophenone compound 10-5 with DMF acetal in DMF at elevated temperatures to give the dimethylamino compound 10-6. The 4-arylpyrazolo compounds 10-7 can be prepared by treating the dimethylamino compound 10-6 with hydrazine in a solvent such as ethanol. 15 OB'O HN-N 10-1 NaH DMF Sem-Cl OBO , N-N 10-2 SEM DMF-acetal Ar-x^z -- O Ar-L Scheme 10 Suzuki conditions 10-5                    10-6 N-N sem' 10-3 NH2NH2 Ar TFA A NH4OH   V ---- HN-N 10-9 Ar N~NH 10-7 20 As shown in Scheme 11 the substituted pyrazole compound 11-5 can be prepared by a variety of methods, such as by removing the protecting group e.g., SEM from compound 11-4 under conditions previously described. For example the substituted pyrazole N-protected compound 11-4 can be prepared by reaction of the intermediate pyrazole N-protected compound 11-3 with an appropriately substituted alkyl halide, benzyl halide, alkyl sulfonates, e.g., mesylate or tosylate, or other suitable leaving group L, in an appropriate solvent such as MeCN, DMF or tetrahydrofuran (THF), in the presence of a base such a sodium hydride or cesium carbonate. The N-aryl pyrazole 114 (wherein Y is aromatic) may be prepared by reacting the intermediate pyrazole 11-3 with an appropriately substituted aryl boronic acid in a solvent such as dichloromethane (DCM) with copper 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 acetate and pyridine. Alternatively the N-aryl pyrazole 11-4 (wherein Y is aromatic) can be prepared by reacting the intermediate pyrazole 11-3 with an appropriately substituted aryl-fluoride in a solvent such as DMF at elevated temperature. Or, the substituted pyrazole compounds 11-4 (wherein Z is a group such as nitrile or ester and Y is at least two carbons) can be prepared by the reaction of 5 intermediate pyrazole 11-3 with an appropriately substituted acrylate, acrylonitrile or other Michael-like acceptors in a solvent such as DMF in the presence of a base such as 1,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undec-7-ene (DBU) or triethylamine (TEA) and at a temperature below the boiling point of the solvent. If there are some functional groups present within the Y and / or Z group, further modification can be made. For example, a CN group can be hydrolyzed to afford an amide group; a 10 carboxylic acid can be converted to a ester, which in turn can be further reduced to alcohol. One skilled in the art will recognize the further modifications if appropriate. Scheme 11 + N-NH , B-. O O 11-2 N-NH DMF K2CO3 / H2O 7-10%TetraKis heat R3 11-3 Z-(Y)n-Br NaH / DMF OR Cs2CO3 / AcCN Ph-B(OH)2 Cu(OAc)2 MeCl2 / Pyr Ph-F DMF heat "Michael" Addition DBU / DMF 15           As shown in Scheme 12, pyrazole 12-1 wherein P is a suitable amine protecting group such as SEM can be reacted with an alkyne-containing conjugate acceptor such as 12-2, wherein Z is an electron-withdrawing group (for example, -CN) optionally in the presence of a base (DBU or K2CO3 and the like) in a solvent such as DMF or MeCN for variable lengths of time to provide olefin-containing adducts 12-3. Compounds represented by the formula 12-3 can be deprotected by 20 appropriate methods according to the nature of the protecting group used to afford compounds of the invention 12-4. 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 Scheme 12 12-1 12-3 As shown in Scheme 13, oxazole- or thiazole-containing compounds 13-6 can be prepared starting with N-protected 4-chloro-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyrimidine 13-1 wherein P is a suitable amine 5 protecting group such as SEM. Oxazole- or thiazole-containing products of formula 13-2 can be prepared by palladium-catalyzed coupling of 13-1 with oxazole or thiazole. The compound 13-2 can be reacted with a metal alkyl such as n-butyllithium to generate the aromatic anion in situ to which can be added at low temperatures (preferably between -78oC and 0oC) derivatives of carboxylic acids 13-3 (wherein W = N(Me)(OMe) when X1=S; and W = Cl when X1=O), in the presence of other 10 additives such as zinc chloride and copper(I) iodide when X1=O, in a suitable solvent such as THF to generate a variety of ketones 13-4. Ketones 13-4 can be caused to react with a variety of reagents such as diethyl (cyanomethyl)phosphonate or triethylphosphonoacetate in the presence of a base like potassium tert-butoxide followed by reduction (including hydrogenation or a copper-hydride catalyzed conjugate reduction), or with reagents such as tosylmethyl isocyanide to provide products of 15 formula 13-5 wherein Z is an electron-withdrawing group such as ester or -CN. If there are functional groups present within the R group or encompassed by the Z group, further modification can be made, and such appropriate further modifications will be recognized by one skilled in the art. Compounds 13-5 can be deprotected by appropriate methods according to the nature of the protecting group used to afford their corresponding deprotected counterparts 13-6. 20 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 KOAc DMA heat Scheme 13 N=\, X1 Pd(PPh3)4 base, additives O R W 13-3 13-4 Z deprotection Z As shown in Scheme 14, aminothiazole-containing cores 14-5 can be synthesized starting with thiazole-containing core 14-1 wherein P is a suitable amine protecting group such as SEM. The 5 compound 14-1 can be treated with a metal alkyl such as n-butyllithium to generate the aromatic anion in situ to which can be added a suitable source of electrophilic halogen such as carbon tetrabromide to afford the halogenated derivative 14-2. The protecting group P of 14-2 can be removed by an appropriate method according to the nature of the protecting group to yield product 14-3. The compound 14-3 can be reacted with amines 14-4 at elevated temperatures in a suitable 10 solvent such as DMF to afford the compound of the invention, 14-5. 14-1 deprotection 14-2 V H 14-4 heat 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 As shown in Scheme 15, pyrrole-containing cores 15-4 can be synthesized starting with N-protected 4-chloro-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyrimidine 15-1 wherein P is a suitable amine protecting group such as DEM (diethoxymethyl). The compound 15-1 can be reacted with 1-(triisopropylsilyl)pyrrole-3- 5 boronic acid under Suzuki coupling conditions to afford the simultaneously pyrrole-deprotected core 15-2. Pyrrole-containing compounds 15-2 can be reacted with alkenes 15-3 containing an electronwithdrawing group Z (such as -CN) in the presence of an appropriate base (such as DBU) at various temperatures (e.g., between room temperature and 40° C) followed by an in situ or separate deprotection step that is suitable for the selected protecting group to afford compounds of the 10 invention 15-4. Scheme 15 TIPS B(OH)2 15-1 Pd(PPh3)4 Na2CO3 DME / H2O heat 15-2 As shown in Scheme 16, a substituted pyrazole compound containing a sulfone or sulfoxide functionality as in 16-6 can be prepared by a variety of methods, such as starting 15 with an appropriately substituted bromo thiophenyl ether 16-2. Thioether 16-2 may be readily prepared by alkylation of the thiophenol 16-1 with an alkyl halide, mesylate or the like using a base like DBU, potassium carbonate or sodium hydride. The cinnamyl nitrile 16-3 may be prepared by Heck chemistry and the like, using palladium acetate and triphenylphosphine in DMF at an appropriate temperature with acrylonitrile. The SEM 20 protected intermediate 16-4 may be prepared by methods previously described for performing the Michael like addition of the pyrazole core to an appropriately substituted a—P unsaturated nitrile like 16-3. The sulfoxide 16-5, where n=1, and sulfone 16-5, where n=2, may be prepared by methods well known in the literature for the oxidation of the thio ether 16-4 like m-chloroperbenzoic acid (MCPBA) in DCM. The final compounds 16-6, where n= 0, 1 or 2, 25 may be prepared by methods previously described for the removal of the SEM protecting group. Alternatively, the sulfur oxidation may be performed on compounds 16-2 or 16-3 depending on the compatibility of the substitution in the synthetic scheme. 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 SEM 16-4 Scheme 16 Also, as shown in Scheme 17, substituted pyrazole compounds containing a sulfonamide 5 functionality, such as 17-6 can be prepared by a variety of methods. For example, one may start with an appropriately substituted bromo phenyl sulfonamide 17-2, where Rc and Rd are suitable substituents. A compound 17-2 may be readily prepared by reaction of the bromo phenyl sulfonyl chloride 17-1 and an appropriately substituted amine such as an aniline, or a primary or secondary amine in a suitable solvent such as DCM, THF or pyridine. The cinnamyl nitrile 17-3 may be 10 prepared by Heck chemistry or the like, using palladium acetate and triphenylphosphine in DMF at an appropriate temperature with acrylonitrile. The final compounds 17-6 where Rc and Rd are part of the sulfonamide functional group may be prepared by methods analogous to those described in Scheme 16 starting with the cinnamyl nitrile 17-3. 15 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 Also, as shown in Scheme 18, substituted pyrazole compounds containing an alphaallyl cyclopentylmethylene functionality, such as 18-8, can be prepared by, for example, reacting a pyrazole 18-3, wherein P is a suitable amine protecting group such as SEM and X 5 is N or C, with a cyclopentylacrylate ester 18-4 to form the ester 18-5. The ester 18-5 may then be reduced to the corresponding aldehyde, 18-6, for example, by the two-step procedure of reducing to the alcohol and selectively oxidizing the intermediate alcohol to the aldehyde, e.g., via a Swern oxidation.. The aldehyde, 18-6, may then be converted to the corresponding olefin, 18-7, for example by reaction with a Wittig reagent. The olefin 18-7, may then be 10 deprotected, as described earlier, to produce the formula 18-7 compound. The intermediate, 18-4, may be prepared, for example as shown in Scheme 18, stearting with cyclopentylaldehyde. Scheme 18 15           Also, as shown in Scheme 19, the cyanoguanidine derivative 19-6 can be prepared starting from substituted pyrazole compounds such as pyrazole 18-3, wherein P is a suitable protecting group 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 such as SEM and X is N or C. A compound 18-3 may, for example, be reacted with olefin 19-1, prepared by Horner-Wadsworth Emmons reaction of the corresponding Boc-protected piperidone, in the presence of a suitable basic catalyst, in a suitable solvent, to form 19-2. The intermediate 19-2 is deprotected using a suitable deprotection reaction, to provide the amine compound 19-3, which then 5 reacts selectively with a cyanoimidocarbonate reagent such as 19-4, in a polar solvent at a suitable temperature, for example, about 20 °C to give a cyanoimidocarbamate such as 19-5, which can then be reacted with any of a variety of amines at elevated temperature to give product 19-6. Scheme 19 N-NH R3 18-3 CN NC N-N NBoc NC NH NC N-N R2 N Boc 19-1 R3 19-2 N-N CN NH2 NH3 NC N-N P CN deprotection R2 S 19-4 CN R3 19-3 R2 R3 19-6 100o C R2 R3 19-5 R2 10 The intermediate compounds 20-5 and 20-6 may be prepared by a variety of methods in the literature, for example, methods such as are outlined in Scheme 20. The intermediate compound 20-3 may be prepared by reaction of the aldehyde compound 20-1 with an appropriately substituted Wittig reagent or Horner Emmons reagents to give the a-p unsubstituted ester 20-3. Alternatively, 20-3 may 15 be prepared by a Heck-like reaction with an appropriately substituted aryl bromide 20-2 and an acrylic ester in the presence of a palladium reagent at elevated temperatures. The compound 20-4 may be prepared by methods previously described for the Michael-like addition of an appropriately 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 substituted pyrrole 18-3 on the a-p unsaturated ester compound 20-3. The aldehyde compound 20-5 may be prepared by reduction of the ester compound 20-4 with reagents such as diisobutyl aluminium hydride at low temperatures such as about -78 °C in an appropriate solvent. The aldehyde compound 20-5 can be further reduced to the corresponding alcohol compound 20-6 with reagents such as 5 sodium borohydride in methanol. Alternatively the alcohol compound 20-6 may be prepared directly by reduction of the ester 20-4 with reagents such as lithium aluminium hydride in appropriate solvent and at appropriate temperatures. 10 The compounds 21-2 and 21-3 may be prepared by using a variety of methods in the literature, such as, for example, methods outlined in Scheme 21. The olefin compound 21-1 may be prepared by the reaction of aldehyde compound 20-5 with an appropriately substituted Wittig reagent 15 or Horner Emmons reagents using a base such as sodium hydride or potassium t-butoxide in an appropriate solvent and conducted at temperature. The olefin compound compound 21-1 may be reduced to the saturated compound 21-2, for example, using hydrogenation conditions well known in the literature, e.g., hydrogen in the presence of palladium on carbon in a solvent such as methanol. The acetylenic compound 21-3 may be prepared by methods previously described, or by reaction of 20 the aldehyde 20-5 with Bestmann-Ohira reagent (E. Quesada et al, Tetrahedron, 62 (2006) 6673- 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 6680) as described in the literature. Alternatively the alcohol compound 20-6 in Scheme 20 may be oxidized to the aldehyde 20-5 with methods well known in the literature, e.g., Swern oxidation conditions, followed by reaction with the Bestmann-Ohira reagent, wherein this reaction sequence may be carried out either as a one pot two-step reaction sequence, or in two separate reaction steps. 5 Scheme 21 N—N R R1 R2 R3 21-3 P H N—N R1 R3 R2 P 20-5 10          The compounds 22-1 and 22-3 may be prepared by using a variety of methods in the literature, for example, via methods outlined in Scheme 22. The oxygen-substituted compound 22-1 may be prepared, for example, by reaction of an appropriately substituted alcohol 20-6 (in Scheme 20), wherein X is N or C, and P is a protecting group, with a base such as sodium hydride and an appropriate agent such as an alkyl iodide, carbonate, or isocyanate, carried out in a suitable solvent 15 and at a suitable temperature. Alternatively, the alcohol group on the compound 20-6 may be converted to a leaving group LG, as in compound 22-2, where the leaving group can be, for example, 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 bromide or mesylate. The compound 22-2 serves as a substrate for subsequent reaction with a nucleophile, such as, for example, sodium ethoxide (Nuc = ethoxy). Scheme 22 5 It should noted that in all of the Schemes described herein, if there are functional groups present on a substituent group such as Y, Z, R, R1, R2, R5, etc., further modification can be made if appropriate and desired. For example, a CN group can be hydrolyzed to afford an amide group; a carboxylic acid can be converted to a ester, which in turn can be reduced to an alcohol, which in turn 10 can be further modified. In another example, an OH group can be converted into a better leaving group such as mesylate, which in turn is suitable for nucleophilic substitution, such as by CN. One skilled in the art will recognize such further modifications. Methods 15           Compounds of the invention can modulate activity of one or more Janus kinases (JAKs). The term “modulate” is meant to refer to an ability to increase or decrease the activity of one or more members of the JAK family of kinases. Accordingly, compounds of the invention can be used in methods of modulating a JAK by contacting the JAK with any one or more of the compounds or compositions described herein. In some embodiments, compounds of the present invention can act as 20 inhibitors of one or more JAKs. In some embodiments, compounds of the present invention can act to 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 stimulate the activity of one or more JAKs. In further embodiments, the compounds of the invention can be used to modulate activity of a JAK in an individual in need of modulation of the receptor by administering a modulating amount of a compound of Formula Ia, Ib, or Ic. JAKs to which the present compounds bind and / or modulate include any member of the JAK 5 family. In some embodiments, the JAK is JAK1, JAK2, JAK3 or TYK2. In some embodiments, the JAK is JAK1 or JAK2. In some embodiments, the JAK is JAK2. In some embodiments, the JAK is JAK3. The compounds of the invention can be selective. By “selective” is meant that the compound binds to or inhibits a JAK with greater affinity or potency, respectively, compared to at least one other 10 JAK. In some embodiments, the compounds of the invention are selective inhibitors of JAK1 or JAK2 over JAK3 and / or TYK2. In some embodiments, the compounds of the invention are selective inhibitors of JAK2 (e.g., over JAK1, JAK3 and TYK2). Without wishing to be bound by theory, because inhibitors of JAK3 can lead to immunosuppressive effects, a compound which is selective for JAK2 over JAK3 and which is useful in the treatment of cancer (such as multiple myeloma, for 15 example) can offer the additional advantage of having fewer immunosuppressive side effects. Selectivity can be at least about 5-fold, 10-fold, at least about 20-fold, at least about 50-fold, at least about 100-fold, at least about 200-fold, at least about 500-fold or at least about 1000-fold. Selectivity can be measured by methods routine in the art. In some embodiments, selectivity can be tested at the Km of each enzyme. In some embodiments, selectivity of compounds of the invention for JAK2 over 20 JAK3 can be determined by the cellular ATP concentration. Another aspect of the present invention pertains to methods of treating a JAK-associated disease or disorder in an individual (e.g., patient) by administering to the individual in need of such treatment a therapeutically effective amount or dose of a compound of the present invention or a pharmaceutical composition thereof. A JAK-associated disease can include any disease, disorder or 25 condition that is directly or indirectly linked to expression or activity of the JAK, including overexpression and / or abnormal activity levels. A JAK-associated disease can also include any disease, disorder or condition that can be prevented, ameliorated, or cured by modulating JAK activity. Examples of JAK-associated diseases include diseases involving the immune system including, for example, organ transplant rejection (e.g., allograft rejection and graft versus host 30 disease). Further examples of JAK-associated diseases include autoimmune diseases such as multiple sclerosis, rheumatoid arthritis, juvenile arthritis, type I diabetes, lupus, psoriasis, inflammatory bowel disease, ulcerative colitis, Crohn’s disease, myasthenia gravis, immunoglobulin nephropathies, autoimmune thyroid disorders, and the like. In some embodiments, the autoimmune disease is an 35 autoimmune bullous skin disorder such as pemphigus vulgaris (PV) or bullous pemphigoid (BP). Further examples of JAK-associated diseases include allergic conditions such as asthma, food allergies, atopic dermatitis and rhinitis. Further examples of JAK-associated diseases include viral 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 diseases such as Epstein Barr Virus (EBV), Hepatitis B, Hepatitis C, HIV, HTLV 1, Varicella-Zoster Virus (VZV) and Human Papilloma Virus (HPV). Further examples of JAK-associated diseases or conditions include skin disorders such as psoriasis (for example, psoriasis vulgaris), atopic dermatitis, skin rash, skin irritation, skin 5 sensitization (e.g., contact dermatitis or allergic contact dermatitis). For example, certain substances including some pharmaceuticals when topically applied can cause skin sensitization. In some embodiments, co-administration or sequential administration of at least one JAK inhibitor of the invention together with the agent causing unwanted sensitization can be helpful in treating such unwanted sensitization or dermatitis. In some embodiments, the skin disorder is treated by topical 10 administration of at least one JAK inhibitor of the invention. In further embodiments, the JAK-associated disease is cancer including those characterized by solid tumors (e.g., prostate cancer, renal cancer, hepatic cancer, pancreatic cancer, gastric cancer, breast cancer, lung cancer, cancers of the head and neck, thyroid cancer, glioblastoma, Kaposi’s sarcoma, Castleman’s disease, melanoma etc.), hematological cancers (e.g., lymphoma, leukemia such 15 as acute lymphoblastic leukemia, or multiple myeloma), and skin cancer such as cutaneous T-cell lymphoma (CTCL) and cutaneous B-cell lymphoma. Example cutaneous T-cell lymphomas include Sezary syndrome and mycosis fungoides. JAK-associated diseases can further include those characterized by expression of a mutant JAK2 such as those having at least one mutation in the pseudo-kinase domain (e.g., JAK2V617F). 20           JAK-associated diseases can further include myeloproliferative disorders (MPDs) such as polycythemia vera (PV), essential thrombocythemia (ET), myeloid metaplasia with myelofibrosis (MMM), chronic myelogenous leukemia (CML), chronic myelomonocytic leukemia (CMML), hypereosinophilic syndrome (HES), systemic mast cell disease (SMCD), and the like. Further JAK-associated diseases include inflammation and inflammatory diseases. Example 25 inflammatory diseases include inflammatory diseases of the eye (e.g., iritis, uveitis, scleritis, conjunctivitis, or related disease), inflammatory diseases of the respiratory tract (e.g., the upper respiratory tract including the nose and sinuses such as rhinitis or sinusitis or the lower respiratory tract including bronchitis, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, and the like), inflammatory myopathy such as myocarditis, and other inflammatory diseases. 30           The JAK inhibitors described herein can further be used to treat ischemia reperfusion injuries or a disease or condition related to an inflammatory ischemic event such as stroke or cardiac arrest. The JAK inhibitors described herein can further be used to treat anorexia, cachexia, or fatigue such as that resulting from or associated with cancer. The JAK inhibitors described herein can further be used to treat restenosis, sclerodermitis, or fibrosis. The JAK inhibitors described herein can further be used 35 to treat conditions associated with hypoxia or astrogliosis such as, for example, diabetic retinopathy, cancer, or neurodegeneration. See, e.g., Dudley, A.C. et al. Biochem. J. 2005, 390(Pt 2):427-36 and Sriram, K. et al. J. Biol. Chem. 2004, 279(19):19936-47. Epub 2004 Mar 2. 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 As used herein, the term “contacting” refers to the bringing together of indicated moieties in an in vitro system or an in vivo system. For example, “contacting” a JAK with a compound of the invention includes the administration of a compound of the present invention to an individual or patient, such as a human, having a JAK, as well as, for example, introducing a compound of the 5 invention into a sample containing a cellular or purified preparation containing the JAK. As used herein, the term “individual” or “patient,” used interchangeably, refers to any animal, including mammals, preferably mice, rats, other rodents, rabbits, dogs, cats, swine, cattle, sheep, horses, or primates, and most preferably humans. As used herein, the phrase “therapeutically effective amount” refers to the amount of active 10 compound or pharmaceutical agent that elicits the biological or medicinal response in a tissue, system, animal, individual or human that is being sought by a researcher, veterinarian, medical doctor or other clinician, which includes one or more of the following: (1) preventing the disease; for example, preventing a disease, condition or disorder in an individual who may be predisposed to the disease, condition or disorder but does not yet experience or 15 display the pathology or symptomatology of the disease; (2) inhibiting the disease; for example, inhibiting a disease, condition or disorder in an individual who is experiencing or displaying the pathology or symptomatology of the disease, condition or disorder (i.e., arresting further development of the pathology and / or symptomatology), and 20           (3) ameliorating the disease; for example, ameliorating a disease, condition or disorder in an individual who is experiencing or displaying the pathology or symptomatology of the disease, condition or disorder (i.e., reversing the pathology and / or symptomatology). Combination Therapies 25           One or more additional pharmaceutical agents such as, for example, chemotherapeutics, anti inflammatory agents, steroids, immunosuppressants, as well as Bcr-Abl, Flt-3, RAF and FAK kinase inhibitors such as, for example, those described in WO 2006 / 056399, or other agents can be used in combination with the compounds of the present invention for treatment of JAK-associated diseases, disorders or conditions. The one or more additional pharmaceutical agents can be administered to a 30 patient simultaneously or sequentially. Example chemotherapeutic include proteosome inhibitors (e.g., bortezomib), thalidomide, revlimid, and DNA-damaging agents such as melphalan, doxorubicin, cyclophosphamide, vincristine, etoposide, carmustine, and the like. Example steroids include coriticosteroids such as dexamethasone or prednisone. 35           Example Bcr-Abl inhibitors include the compounds, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, of the genera and species disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,521,184, WO 04 / 005281, EP2005 / 009967, EP2005 / 010408, and U.S. Ser. No. 60 / 578,491. 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 Example suitable Flt-3 inhibitors include compounds, and their pharmaceutically acceptable salts, as disclosed in WO 03 / 037347, WO 03 / 099771, and WO 04 / 046120. Example suitable RAF inhibitors include compounds, and their pharmaceutically acceptable salts, as disclosed in WO 00 / 09495 and WO 05 / 028444. 5           Example suitable FAK inhibitors include compounds, and their pharmaceutically acceptable salts, as disclosed in WO 04 / 080980, WO 04 / 056786, WO 03 / 024967, WO 01 / 064655, WO 00 / 053595, and WO 01 / 014402. In some embodiments, one or more JAK inhibitors of the invention can be used in combination with a chemotherapeutic in the treatment of cancer, such as multiple myeloma, and may 10 improve the treatment response as compared to the response to the chemotherapeutic agent alone, without exacerbation of its toxic effects. Examples of additional pharmaceutical agents used in the treatment of multiple myeloma, for example, can include, without limitation, melphalan, melphalan plus prednisone [MP], doxorubicin, dexamethasone, and Velcade (bortezomib). Further additional agents used in the treatment of multiple myeloma include Bcr-Abl, Flt-3, RAF and FAK kinase 15 inhibitors. Additive or synergistic effects are desirable outcomes of combining a JAK inhibitor of the present invention with an additional agent. Furthermore, resistance of multiple myeloma cells to agents such as dexamethasone may be reversible upon treatment with a JAK inhibitor of the present invention. The agents can be combined with the present compounds in a single or continuous dosage form, or the agents can be administered simultaneously or sequentially as separate dosage forms. 20           In some embodiments, a corticosteroid such as dexamethasone is administered to a patient in combination with at least one JAK inhibitor where the dexamethasone is administered intermittently as opposed to continuously. In some further embodiments, combinations of one or more JAK inhibitors of the invention with other therapeutic agents can be administered to a patient prior to, during, and / or after a bone 25 marrow transplant or stem cell transplant. Pharmaceutical Formulations and Dosage Forms When employed as pharmaceuticals, the compounds of the invention can be administered in the form of pharmaceutical compositions. These compositions can be prepared in a manner well 30 known in the pharmaceutical art, and can be administered by a variety of routes, depending upon whether local or systemic treatment is desired and upon the area to be treated. Administration may be topical (including transdermal, epidermal, ophthalmic and to mucous membranes including intranasal, vaginal and rectal delivery), pulmonary (e.g., by inhalation or insufflation of powders or aerosols, including by nebulizer; intratracheal or intranasal), oral or parenteral. Parenteral administration 35 includes intravenous, intraarterial, subcutaneous, intraperitoneal intramuscular or injection or infusion; or intracranial, e.g., intrathecal or intraventricular, administration. Parenteral administration can be in the form of a single bolus dose, or may be, for example, by a continuous perfusion pump. 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 Pharmaceutical compositions and formulations for topical administration may include transdermal patches, ointments, lotions, creams, gels, drops, suppositories, sprays, liquids and powders. Conventional pharmaceutical carriers, aqueous, powder or oily bases, thickeners and the like may be necessary or desirable. Coated condoms, gloves and the like may also be useful. 5           This invention also includes pharmaceutical compositions which contain, as the active ingredient, one or more of the compounds of the invention above in combination with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers (excipients). In making the compositions of the invention, the active ingredient is typically mixed with an excipient, diluted by an excipient or enclosed within such a carrier in the form of, for example, a capsule, sachet, paper, or other container. When the excipient 10 serves as a diluent, it can be a solid, semi-solid, or liquid material, which acts as a vehicle, carrier or medium for the active ingredient. Thus, the compositions can be in the form of tablets, pills, powders, lozenges, sachets, cachets, elixirs, suspensions, emulsions, solutions, syrups, aerosols (as a solid or in a liquid medium), ointments containing, for example, up to 10% by weight of the active compound, soft and hard gelatin capsules, suppositories, sterile injectable solutions, and sterile packaged 15 powders. In preparing a formulation, the active compound can be milled to provide the appropriate particle size prior to combining with the other ingredients. If the active compound is substantially insoluble, it can be milled to a particle size of less than 200 mesh. If the active compound is substantially water soluble, the particle size can be adjusted by milling to provide a substantially 20 uniform distribution in the formulation, e.g. about 40 mesh. Some examples of suitable excipients include lactose, dextrose, sucrose, sorbitol, mannitol, starches, gum acacia, calcium phosphate, alginates, tragacanth, gelatin, calcium silicate, microcrystalline cellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone, cellulose, water, syrup, and methyl cellulose. The formulations can additionally include: lubricating agents such as talc, magnesium stearate, and 25 mineral oil; wetting agents; emulsifying and suspending agents; preserving agents such as methyl- and propylhydroxy-benzoates; sweetening agents; and flavoring agents. The compositions of the invention can be formulated so as to provide quick, sustained or delayed release of the active ingredient after administration to the patient by employing procedures known in the art. The compositions can be formulated in a unit dosage form, each dosage containing from 30 about 5 to about 1000 mg (1 g), more usually about 100 to about 500 mg, of the active ingredient. The term "unit dosage forms" refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosages for human subjects and other mammals, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active material calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect, in association with a suitable pharmaceutical excipient. 35           The active compound can be effective over a wide dosage range and is generally administered in a pharmaceutically effective amount. It will be understood, however, that the amount of the compound actually administered will usually be determined by a physician, according to the relevant 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 circumstances, including the condition to be treated, the chosen route of administration, the actual compound administered, the age, weight, and response of the individual patient, the severity of the patient's symptoms, and the like. For preparing solid compositions such as tablets, the principal active ingredient is mixed with 5 a pharmaceutical excipient to form a solid preformulation composition containing a homogeneous mixture of a compound of the present invention. When referring to these preformulation compositions as homogeneous, the active ingredient is typically dispersed evenly throughout the composition so that the composition can be readily subdivided into equally effective unit dosage forms such as tablets, pills and capsules. This solid preformulation is then subdivided into unit dosage forms of the 10 type described above containing from, for example, about 0.1 to about 1000 mg of the active ingredient of the present invention. The tablets or pills of the present invention can be coated or otherwise compounded to provide a dosage form affording the advantage of prolonged action. For example, the tablet or pill can comprise an inner dosage and an outer dosage component, the latter being in the form of an envelope 15 over the former. The two components can be separated by an enteric layer which serves to resist disintegration in the stomach and permit the inner component to pass intact into the duodenum or to be delayed in release. A variety of materials can be used for such enteric layers or coatings, such materials including a number of polymeric acids and mixtures of polymeric acids with such materials as shellac, cetyl alcohol, and cellulose acetate. 20           The liquid forms in which the compounds and compositions of the present invention can be incorporated for administration orally or by injection include aqueous solutions, suitably flavored syrups, aqueous or oil suspensions, and flavored emulsions with edible oils such as cottonseed oil, sesame oil, coconut oil, or peanut oil, as well as elixirs and similar pharmaceutical vehicles. Compositions for inhalation or insufflation include solutions and suspensions in 25 pharmaceutically acceptable, aqueous or organic solvents, or mixtures thereof, and powders. The liquid or solid compositions may contain suitable pharmaceutically acceptable excipients as described supra. In some embodiments, the compositions are administered by the oral or nasal respiratory route for local or systemic effect. Compositions in can be nebulized by use of inert gases. Nebulized solutions may be breathed directly from the nebulizing device or the nebulizing device can be 30 attached to a face masks tent, or intermittent positive pressure breathing machine. Solution, suspension, or powder compositions can be administered orally or nasally from devices which deliver the formulation in an appropriate manner. The amount of compound or composition administered to a patient will vary depending upon what is being administered, the purpose of the administration, such as prophylaxis or therapy, the state 35 of the patient, the manner of administration, and the like. In therapeutic applications, compositions can be administered to a patient already suffering from a disease in an amount sufficient to cure or at least partially arrest the symptoms of the disease and its complications. Effective doses will depend on 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 the disease condition being treated as well as by the judgment of the attending clinician depending upon factors such as the severity of the disease, the age, weight and general condition of the patient, and the like. The compositions administered to a patient can be in the form of pharmaceutical 5 compositions described above. These compositions can be sterilized by conventional sterilization techniques, or may be sterile filtered. Aqueous solutions can be packaged for use as is, or lyophilized, the lyophilized preparation being combined with a sterile aqueous carrier prior to administration. The pH of the compound preparations typically will be between 3 and 11, more preferably from 5 to 9 and most preferably from 7 to 8. It will be understood that use of certain of the foregoing excipients, 10 carriers, or stabilizers will result in the formation of pharmaceutical salts. The therapeutic dosage of the compounds of the present invention can vary according to, for example, the particular use for which the treatment is made, the manner of administration of the compound, the health and condition of the patient, and the judgment of the prescribing physician. The proportion or concentration of a compound of the invention in a pharmaceutical composition can vary 15 depending upon a number of factors including dosage, chemical characteristics (e.g., hydrophobicity), and the route of administration. For example, the compounds of the invention can be provided in an aqueous physiological buffer solution containing about 0.1 to about 10% w / v of the compound for parenteral administration. Some typical dose ranges are from about 1 ^g / kg to about 1 g / kg of body weight per day. In some embodiments, the dose range is from about 0.01 mg / kg to about 100 mg / kg 20 of body weight per day. The dosage is likely to depend on such variables as the type and extent of progression of the disease or disorder, the overall health status of the particular patient, the relative biological efficacy of the compound selected, formulation of the excipient, and its route of administration. Effective doses can be extrapolated from dose-response curves derived from in vitro or animal model test systems. 25           The compositions of the invention can further include one or more additional pharmaceutical agents such as a chemotherapeutic, steroid, anti-inflammatory compound, or immunosuppressant, examples of which are listed hereinabove. Labeled Compounds and Assay Methods 30           Another aspect of the present invention relates to labeled compounds of the invention (radio labeled, fluorescent-labeled, etc.) that would be useful not only in imaging techniques but also in assays, both in vitro and in vivo, for localizing and quantitating JAK in tissue samples, including human, and for identifying JAK ligands by inhibition binding of a labeled compound. Accordingly, the present invention includes JAK assays that contain such labeled compounds. 35           The present invention further includes isotopically-labeled compounds of the invention. An “isotopically” or “radio-labeled” compound is a compound of the invention where one or more atoms are replaced or substituted by an atom having an atomic mass or mass number different from the 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 atomic mass or mass number typically found in nature (i.e., naturally occurring). Suitable radionuclides that may be incorporated in compounds of the present invention include but are not limited to 2H (also written as D for deuterium), 3H (also written as T for tritium), 11C, 13C, 14C, 13N, 15N, 15O, 17O, 18O, 18F, 35S, 36Cl, 82Br, 75Br, 76Br, 77Br, 123I, 124I, 125I and 131I. The radionuclide that is 5 incorporated in the instant radio-labeled compounds will depend on the specific application of that radio-labeled compound. For example, for in vitro metalloprotease labeling and competition assays, compounds that incorporate 3H, 14C, 82Br, 125I , 131I, 35S or will generally be most useful. For radioimaging applications 11C, 18F, 125I, 123I, 124I, 131I, 75Br, 76Br or 77Br will generally be most useful. It is understood that a “radio-labeled ” or “labeled compound” is a compound that has 10 incorporated at least one radionuclide. In some embodiments the radionuclide is selected from the group consisting of 3H, 14C, 125I , 35S and 82Br. The present invention can further include synthetic methods for incorporating radio-isotopes into compounds of the invention. Synthetic methods for incorporating radio-isotopes into organic compounds are well known in the art, and an ordinary skill in the art will readily recognize the 15 methods applicable for the compounds of invention. A labeled compound of the invention can be used in a screening assay to identify / evaluate compounds. For example, a newly synthesized or identified compound (i.e., test compound) which is labeled can be evaluated for its ability to bind a JAK by monitoring its concentration variation when contacting with the JAK, through tracking of the labeling. For example, a test compound (labeled) 20 can be evaluated for its ability to reduce binding of another compound which is known to bind to a JAK (i.e., standard compound). Accordingly, the ability of a test compound to compete with the standard compound for binding to the JAK directly correlates to its binding affinity. Conversely, in some other screening assays, the standard compound is labeled and test compounds are unlabeled. Accordingly, the concentration of the labeled standard compound is monitored in order to evaluate the 25 competition between the standard compound and the test compound, and the relative binding affinity of the test compound is thus ascertained. Kits The present invention also includes pharmaceutical kits useful, for example, in the treatment 30 or prevention of JAK-associated diseases or disorders, such as cancer, which include one or more containers containing a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the invention. Such kits can further include, if desired, one or more of various conventional pharmaceutical kit components, such as, for example, containers with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, additional containers, etc., as will be readily apparent to those 35 skilled in the art. Instructions, either as inserts or as labels, indicating quantities of the components to be administered, guidelines for administration, and / or guidelines for mixing the components, can also be included in the kit. 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 The invention will be described in greater detail by way of specific examples. The following examples are offered for illustrative purposes, and are not intended to limit the invention in any manner. Those of skill in the art will readily recognize a variety of noncritical parameters which can be changed or modified to yield essentially the same results.    The compounds of the Examples 5 have been found to be JAK inhibitors according to at least one assay described herein. EXAMPLES Example 1: 3-[3-Methyl-1-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]benzonitrile 10 Step 1. 1H-Pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine 7-oxide To a solution of 1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (4.90 g, 0.0415 mol) in ethyl acetate (41 mL, 0.42 mol) was added a solution of meta-chloroperbenzoic acid (MCPBA; 9.3 g, 0.054 mol) in ethyl acetate (27 mL, 0.28 mol) at 0 °C. The reaction mixture was solidified when ~20 mL solution of MCPBA 15 was added. An additional ~10 mL of ethyl acetate was added so that a solution resulted. The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature (rt) and stirred overnight, then was cooled at 0 °C, filtered and washed with ethyl acetate three times to give 10.94 g wet solid. The wet solid (8.45 g) was then suspended in water (35 mL), and to the suspension was added 13 mL of sat. Na2CO3 dropwise, and the resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The mixture was then 20 cooled at 0° C, filtered and washed with water (x4) to give 3.55 g of pale purple solid which was dried at 40° C overnight to give the desired product (2.47 g, 44.4% yield). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CD3OD): 8 8.2 (1H, d); 7.95 (1H, d); 7.5 (1H, d); 7.2 (1H, m); 6.65 (1H, d). MS (M+H)+: 136. 25 Step 2. 4-Chloro-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine To a pink solution of 1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine 7-oxide (2.47 g, 0.0184 mol) in dimethylformamide (DMF) (13.3 mL, 0.172 mol) was added methanesulfonyl chloride (4.0 mL, 0.052 mol) at 50 °C, and the pink color changed to orange. The reaction mixture was heated at 73 °C for 2h, then cooled to 40 °C. Water (35 mL) was added, and the resulting suspension was cooled at 0 °C. 30 NaOH was added to adjust the pH of the mixture to about 7. The mixture was filtered and washed 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 with water (x3) to give 3.8 g of a wet pale orange solid that was dried at 40 °C overnight to give the product (2.35 g, 82.2% yield). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCh): 8 10.8 (1H, br); 8.21 (1H, d); 7.41(1H, d); 7.18 (1H, d); 6.61 (1H, d). MS (M+H)+: 153. 5 Step 3. 4-(4-Bromo-3-methyl-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine .. N N H A mixture of 4-chloro-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (0.050 g, 0.00033 mol) and 4-bromo-3-methyl-1H-pyrazole (0.10 g, 0.00066 mol) was heated at 130 °C overnight. The reaction mixture then 10 was subjected to column chromatography (eluting with 5% MeOH / DCM, 0.5% NH4OH, on silica gel) to give 80 mg pale yellow solid which was triturated with MeOH (1.5 mL) to yield the product as a pale yellow solid (44 mg, 44% yield). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CD3OD): 8 8.32 (1H, s); 8.25 (1H, d); 7.6 (1H, s); 7.45 (1H, d); 7.37 (1H, d); 6.96 (1H, d); 2.4 (3H, s). MS (M+H)+: 276. 15 Step 4. 3-[3-Methyl-1-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]benzonitrile A mixture of 4-(4-bromo-3-methyl-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (0.032 g, 0.00012 mol), (3-cyanophenyl)boronic acid (0.027 g, 0.00018 mol), sodium carbonate (0.032 g, 0.00030 mol) and tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) (7.0 mg, 0.0000060 mol) in 1,220 dimethoxyethane (0.3 mL, 0.003 mol) and water (0.3 mL, 0.02 mol) was heated at 130 °C (a liquid resulted, but with two layers) for 4 h. The reaction mixture then was cooled to room temperature (rt), filtered and was washed with water (x2) and dimethyl ether (DME) (x2) to give the product as a pale orange solid (15 mg, 44% yield). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CD3OD): 8 8.57 (1H, s); 8.31 (1H, d); 7.8 (2H, m); 7.75 (2H, m); 7.55 (1H, s); 25   7.45 (2H, m); 7.01 (1H, d); 2.6 (3H, s). MS (M+H)+: 299. Example 2: (2E)-3-[3-Methyl-1-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]acrylonitrile trifluoroacetate salt 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 CN N H TFA Step 1. 4-Bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine To a solution of 1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine 7-oxide (8.0 g, 0.060 mol), prepared by the procedure outlined in Example 1, Step 1 in DMF (100 mL, 1 mol) was added methanesulphonic 5 anhydride (20.8 g, 0.119 mol, in four portions) at 0 °C. The mixture was stirred at 0 °C for an additional 20 min followed by an addition of tetramethylammonium bromide (23.0 g, 0.149 mol). The resulting mixture was stirred overnight. Water (0.1 L) was added, and a slight exotherm was observed. A solution of sodium hydroxide in water (12.5 M, 12 mL) was added to adjust the pH of the mixture to about 8, followed by an addition of ~0.25 L of water. The resulting mixture was 10 stirred for additional 2 h then filtered. The solid obtained was washed with water x3 to give 6.72 g of a reddish solid which was dried at 50 °C over a weekend to give the product (5.75 g, 49% yield). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3): 810.8 (1H, br); 8.2 (1H, d); 7.41(1H, d); 7.19 (1H, d); 6.61 (1H, d). MS (M+H)+: 196. 15 Step 2. 4-Bromo-1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine To a solution of 4-bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (6.2 g, 0.031 mol) and [p-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl chloride (6.7 mL, 0.038 mol) in DMF (62 mL, 0.80 mol) was added sodium hydride (1.5 g, 0.038 mol) at 0 °C, and the resulting solution turned opaque. The mixture was stirred for additional 4 h, then diluted with methyl tert-butyl ether (MTBE). The organic layer was 20 separated and washed with water (x2) and brine aqueous solution successively. The organic phase was dried and concentrated in vacuo to give 14.1 g of a product as a pale orange oil. The oil was purified by column chromatography eluting with 5-20% ethyl acetate / hexanes to give the purified product as a colorless oil (9.66 g , 94% yield). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): 8 8.2 (1H, d); 7.49 (1H, d); 7.19 (1H, d); 6.62 (1H, d); 5.78 (2H, s); 3.6 25    (2H, t); 0.98 (2H, t); 0.0 (9H, s). MS (M+H)+: 326. Step 3. (2E)-3-[3-Methyl-1-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]acrylonitrile A solution of 2-propenenitrile (0.043 mL, 0.00065 mol), bis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(II) chloride (0.0091 g, 0.000013 mol), 4-(4-bromo-3-methyl-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine 30   (0.036 g, 0.00013 mol), and tetraethylamine (TEA) (0.15 mL, 0.0011 mol) in DMF (0.15 mL, 0.0019 mol) was microwaved at 120 °C for 2 h. The solution was then diluted with ethyl acetate and washed 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 with water (x2) and brine successively. The organic phase was dried and concentrated in vacuo to give 62 mg of the product as an orange solid. The orange solid was purified by prep-LCMS to give 12 mg of an off-white solid as a trifluoroacetic acid (TFA) salt which was triturated with MTBE (1 mL) to provide the purified product as a pale green solid. (dried at 60 °C for 4 h, 9 mg , 28% yield). 5    1H NMR (400 MHz, CD3OD): 2 :1 of trans : cis isomers. For trans: 8 8.95 (NH,1H, s); 7.75 (olefin, 1H, d); 6.1 (olefin, 1H, d); 2.45 (Me, 3H, s). MS (M+H)+: 249. Example 3: 3-[3-Methyl-1-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]propanenitrile, trifluoroacetate salt A mixture of (2E)-3-[3-methyl-1-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]acrylo-nitrile, TFA salt, (0.0050 g, 0.000020 mol, prepared according to Example 2) and palladium (5.8 mg, 0.0000054 mol) in methanol (1 mL, 0.02 mol) and 1,2-dichloroethane (1 mL, 0.01 mol) was degassed and then was stirred under an atmosphere of hydrogen for 3 h. The reaction mixture then was filtered 15 and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to give 8 mg of the product as an off-white solid. The crude material was purified by prep-LCMS to give 5.1 mg of a white solid as a TFA salt which was triturated with MTB (1 mL) to give the product as a white solid (1.7 mg, 34% yield). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CD3OD): 8 8.52 (1H, s); 8.35 (1H, d); 7.72(1H, d); 7.6 (1H, s); 7.38 (1H, d); 6.96 (1H, d); 2.7-2.9 (4H, m); 2.4 (3H, s). MS (M+H)+: 251. 20 Example 13: 4-(4-Phenyl-1H-imidazol-1-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine A melt of 4-chloro-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (0.050 g, 0.00033 mol) in 4-phenyl-1H-imidazole (0.24 g, 0.0016 mol) was heated at 200 °C overnight. The reaction was partitioned between 25 ethyl acetate and saturated NaHCO3, separated and the organic phase was washed with brine. The 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 organic layer was then dried and evaporated to give 250 mg of an orange oil. The oil was chromatographed with 7% MeOH / DCM, 0.7% NH4OH, sample in solvent system. Collected 74 mg of the product as an orange glass. The glass was triturated with hot DCE (1.5 mL) to give 51 mg of a brown solid which was dried at 60 °C for 4 h to afford the desired product (50 mg, 59 yield). 5   1H NMR (400 MHz, dimethylsulxoxide (DMSO)): 8 12.5 (1H, s); 8.5 (1H, s); 8.4 (1H, s); 8.38 (1H, d); 7.8 (2H, m); 7.62 (1H, d); 7.4 (3H, m); 7.3 (1H, m); 6.81 (1H, d). MS (M+H)+: 260 Example 14: [3-Methyl-1-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]-piperidin-1-yl- 10 methanone 15 20 Step 1. 3-Methyl-1-(1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid To a -70 °C solution of 4-(4-bromo-3-methyl-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)-1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (0.107 g, 0.000263 mol) in THF (1 mL, 0.01 mol), and n-butyllithium in hexane (0.23 mL of 1.6M), 0.5g of CO2 solid was added. After 15 min, the reaction was quenched with NH4Cl. Ethyl acetate and water were added. The organic phase was washed with brine, and was evaporated to give 84 mg of an off-white glass / solid. The solid was chromatographed with 50% ethyl acetate / hexanes, 0.5% AcOH, sample on silica gel to give 40 mg of a purified product as a white solid (37% yield). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): 8 8.5 (1H, d); 7.45 (1H, d); 7.25 (1H, d); 7.02 (1H, s); 6.6 (1H, d); 5.75 (2H, s); 3.6 (2H, t); 2.48 (3H, s); 0.98 (3H, t); 0.0 (9H, s). MS (M+H)+: 372. Step 2. 4-[3-Methyl-4-(piperidin-1-ylcarbonyl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]-1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine 25           A solution of 3-methyl-1-(1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)- 1H-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (0.040 g, 0.00011 mol) (1:1 of AcOH) and N,N-carbonyldiimidazole (0.035 g, 0.00021 mol) in THF (1 mL, 0.01 mol) was stirred for 1.2h, after which time piperidine (32 ^L, 0.00032 mol) was added. After another 2h, another portion of piperidine (15 p.L) was added and the resulting mixture was stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was then partitioned between ethyl 30 acetate and water, and washed sequentially with sat. NaHCO3 and brine. The organic phase was dried 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 and evaporated to give 49 mg of the crude product as an orange oil / glass. The crude product was chromatographed with 75-100% ethyl acetate / hexanes, sample in DCM. Collected 25 mg of the purified product as a colorless glass / oil (50% yield). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3): 8 8.45 (1H, d); 8.23 (1H, s); 7.5 (1H, d); 7.4 (1H, d); 7.05 (1H, d); 5.8 5    (2H, s); 3.7 (4H, br); 3.6 (2H, t); 2.55 (3H, s); 1.7 (6H, br); 1.0 (3H, t); 0.0 (9H, s). MS (M+H)+: 439. Step 3. 3-Methyl-1-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]-piperidin-1-yl-methanone A solution of 4-[3-methyl-4-(piperidin-1-ylcarbonyl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]-1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)-ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (0.025 g, 0.000057 mol) in TFA (1 mL, 0.01 mol) was 10 stirred for 1.5 h. The reaction mixture was then concentrated and partitioned between DCM and sat. NaHCO3 x2, and brine. The organic layer was then dried and concentrated to give 28 mg of the product as a white foam. The foam was dissolved in methanol (1 mL, 0.02 mol) and treated with ammonium hydroxide in water (8.0M, 1 mL) for 1.5h. The reaction was concentrated using a rotary evaporator to give 24 mg of a pale yellow glass. The glass was triturated with methyl t-butyl ether 15 (MTBE) to give 13 mg of a white solid which was dried at rt over a weekend. A total of 8 mg of the product was obtained after drying (45% yield). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): 8 9.7 (1H, s); 8.4 (1H, d); 8.2 (1H, s); 7.42 (1H, d); 7.4 (1H, d); 6.99 (1H, d); 3.4-3.8 (4H, br); 2.47 (3H, s); 1.5-1.8 (6H, br). MS (M+H)+: 309. 20 Example 15: [3-Methyl-1-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-ylmethyl]-phenyl-amine NHPh Step 1. 3-Methyl-1-(1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazole-25 4-carbaldehyde To a -70 °C solution of 4-(4-bromo-3-methyl-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)-1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (0.25 g, 0.00061 mol) in THF (2 mL, 0.03 mol), 1.6 M n-butyllithium in hexane (0.54 mL). After 10 min, DMF (120 ^L, 0.0015 mol) was added. The reaction was allowed to warm to rt and stirred overnight. The reaction was then quenched with NH4Cl. Ethyl 30 acetate / water was added. The organic phase was separated and washed with brine, then dried and 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 concentrated to give 180 mg of an orange oil. The crude product was chromatographed with 25% ethyl acetate / hexanes, sample in DCM. Collected 40 mg of a pale yellow oil (18% yield). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3): 8 10.15 (1H, s); 8.7 (1H, s); 8.47 (1H, d); 7.58 (1H, d); 7.5 (1H, d); 7.05 (1H, d); 5.8 (2H, s); 3.63 (2H, t); 2.7 (3H, s); 0.98 (3H, t); 0.0 (9H, s). MS (M+H)+: 356. Step 2. N-[3-Methyl-1-(1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]methylaniline A solution of 3-methyl-1-(1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazole-4-carbaldehyde (0.025 g, 0.000070 mol) and aniline (1M in DCM, 0.070 mL), in DCM 10    (1 mL, 0.02 mol) was stirred for 1 min. Acetic acid (20 jaL, 0.0004 mol), aniline (1M in DCM, 140 ^L) and sodium triacetoxyborohydride (0.022 g, 0.00010 mol) were added. The reaction was stirred overnight and partitioned between DCM and sat. NaHCO3, washed with brine. The organic phase was dried and evaporated to give 21 mg of a product as a pale orange glass (70% yield). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): 8 8.4 (1H, d); 8.15 (1H, s); 7.65 (1H, d); 7.35 (3H, m); 7.09 (1H, d); 15    6.82 (1H, m); 6.89 (2H, m); 5.8 (2H, s); 4.35 (2H, s); 3.6 (2H, t); 2.5 (3H, s); 0.99 (3H, t); 0.0 (9H, s). MS (M+H)+: 433. Step 3. [3-Methyl-1-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-ylmethyl]-phenyl-amine Deprotection of N-[3-methyl-1-(1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin- 20 4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]methylaniline was carried out according to the procedures of Example 14, Step 3 to give the desired product (58% yield). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): 8 9.9 (1H, s); 8.38 (1H, d); 8.1 (1H, s); 7.4 (1H, d); 7.35 (1H, d); 7.3 (2H, m); 7.0 (1H, d); 6.79 (1H, m); 6.77 (2H, m); 4.25 (2H, s); 3.81 (1H, s); 2.41 (3H, s). MS (M+H)+: 303. 25 Example 25: 3-[3-Methyl-1-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]-cyclohexanol OH N H N Step 1. 3-Ethoxy-1-[3-methyl-1-(1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)- 30    1H-pyrazol-4-yl]cyclohex-2-en-1-ol 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 / 1 > k N' N CH2O(CH2)2Si(CH3)3 To a -75 °C solution of 4-(4-bromo-3-methyl-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)-1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (0.11 g, 0.00027 mol) in THF (1.5 mL, 0.018 mol) was added 1.6 M n-butyllithium in hexane (0.22 mL). The reaction mixture turned dark orange. After ~10 min, 1.0 5 M magnesium dibromide in ether (0.35 mL) was added. After another 50 min, a solution of 3-ethoxy-2-cyclohexen-1-one (41.5 ^L, 0.000308 mol) in THF (~0.3 mL) was added. The resulting mixture was warmed to -40 °C over ~1h and quenched with NH4Cl. Then ethyl acetate / water was added. The organic phase was washed with brine, and concentrated to give 145 mg of an orange oil. The crude product was chromatographed with 0-50% ethyl acetate / hexane gradient, sample in DCM. Collected 10   35 mg of the produce as an oil (30% yield). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCb): 8 8.49 (1H, d); 8.38 (1H, s); 7.55 (1H, d); 7.4 (1H, d); 7.1 (1H, d); 6.0 (2H, s); 3.6 (2H, t); 2.81 (2H, m); 2.62 (3H, s); 2.58 (2H, m); 2.27 (2H, m); 1.0 (3H, t); 0.0 (9H, s). MS (M+H)+: 422. 15 Step 2. 3-[3-Methyl-1-(1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]cyclohexanol A mixture of 3-[3-methyl-1-(1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]cyclohex-2-en-1-one (0.019 g, 0.000045 mol) and palladium on carbon (Pd / C) (0.018 g, 0.000017 mol) in methanol (2 mL, 0.05 mol) was degassed and was stirred under a 20 hydrogen atmosphere overnight. An additional 48 mg of 10% Pd / C was added and stirred under a hydrogen atmosphere for 8h. The palladium was filtered and the filtrate was stirred with sodium tetrahydroborate (0.032 g, 0.00084 mol) for 5h. The reaction was purified by prep-HPLC to give 5 mg of the desired product. MS (M+H)+: 426. 25 Step 3. 3-[3-Methyl-1-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]-cyclohexanol Deprotection of 3-[3-methyl-1-(1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]cyclohexanol was carried out according to the procedures of Example 14, Step 3 to give the desired product (40% yield). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): 8 9.72 (1H, s); 8.35 (1H, d); 7.95 (1H, s); 7.41 (1H, d); 7.35 (1H, d); 30    7.02 (1H, d); 3.78 (1H, m); 2.6 (1H, m); 2.4 (3H, s); 1.2-2.4 (8H, m). MS (M+H)+: 296. 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 Example 40: 4-[1-(3-Methoxy-1-methyl-propyl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine Step 1. 4-[1-(3-Methoxy-1-methylpropyl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]-1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine 5           To a 0 °C solution of 3-[4-(1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4- yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]butan-1-ol (the alcohol was made by DIBAL reduction of the ester in Example 58) (0.056 g, 0.00014 mol)) in DMF (1 mL, 0.01 mol), was added sodium hydride (0.0107 g, 0.000268 mol). After 5 min, methyl iodide (18 ^L, 0.00029 mol) was added and the resulting mixture was stirred over a weekend. The mixture was then partitioned between ethyl acetate and water, 10 separated and the organic phase was washed with brine. The organic phase was concentrated to give a pale orange oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCb): 8 8.4 (1H, d); 8.3 (1H, s); 8.0 (1H, s); 7.65 (1H, d); 7.27 (1H, d); 6.8 (1H, d); 5.8 (2H, s); 4.7 (1H, m); 3.63 (2H, t); 3.2-3.4 (2H, m); 3.38 (3H, s); 2.1-2.3 (2H, m); 1.7 (3H, d); 1.0 (2H, t); 0.0 (9H, s). MS (M+H)+: 400. 15 Step 2. 4-[1-(3-Methoxy-1-methyl-propyl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine Deprotection of 4-[1-(3-methoxy-1-methylpropyl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]-1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)-ethoxy]-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine was carried out according to the procedures of Example 14, Step 3 to give the desired product (25% yield). 20    1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): 8 10.0 (1H, s); 8.35 (1H, d); 8.18 (1H, s); 7.95 (1H, s); 7.41 (1H, d); 7.21 (1H, d); 6.75 (1H, d); 4.63 (1H, m); 3.15-3.4 (2H, m); 3.35 (3H, s); 2.21-2.05 (2H, m); 1.6 (3H, d). MS (M+H)+: 270. Example 42: 4-[1-(1-Methyl-3-pyrazol-1-yl-propyl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine 25 N-N 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 Step 1. 4-1-[1-Methyl-3-(1H-pyrazol-1-yl)propyl]-1H-pyrazol-4-yl-1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine To a 0 °C solution of 3-[4-(1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-5 yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]butyl methanesulfonate (prepared by mesylation of the alcohol as in Example 59, Step 1) (0.055 g, 0.00012 mol) and 1H-pyrazole (0.025 g, 0.00036 mol) in DMF (1 mL, 0.01 mol) was added sodium hydride (0.014 g, 0.00036 mol). The resulting solution was stirred overnight and then partitioned between ethyl acetate and 0.1 N HCl, water. the organic phase was separated and washed with brine. The organic layer was then concentrated to give 49 mg of a pale orange glass 10    (87% yield). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3): 8 8.4 (1H, d); 8.18 (1H, s); 7.99 (1H, s); 7.6 (1H, t); 7.5 (1H, d); 7.4 (1H, t); 7.27 (1H, d); 6.8 (1H, d); 6.3 (1H, m); 5.8 (2H, s); 4.2 (1H, m); 4.0-4.2 (2H, m); 3.61 (2H, t); 2.58 (2H, m); 1.65 (3H, d); 1.0 (2H, t); 0.0 (9H, s). MS (M+H)+: 436. 15 Step 2. 4-[1-(1-Methyl-3-pyrazol-1-yl-propyl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine Deprotection of 4-1-[1-methyl-3-(1H-pyrazol-1-yl)propyl]-1H-pyrazol-4-yl-1-[2-(trimethyl-silyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine was carried out according to the procedures of Example 14, Step 3 to give the desired product (38% yield). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): 8 9.7 (1H, s); 8.38 (1H, d); 8.1 (1H, s); 7.7(1H, s); 7.59 (1H, t); 7.4 (1H, 20    d); 7.35 (1H, t); 7.21 (1H, d); 6.75 (1H, d); 6.25 (1H, m); 4.4 (1H, m); 3.9-4.15 (2H, m); 2.55 (2H, m); 1.63 (3H, d). MS (M+H)+: 306. The following compounds in Table 1 were made by methods analogous to the procedures above as indicated. “Purification A” indicates that the product following deprotection was purified by preparative-HPLC under the following conditions: C18 eluting with a gradient of MeCN / H2O 25 containing 0.15% NH4OH. Table 1 Ex. No. Structure Name MS (M+H) Prep. Ex. No. 4 O / —o . N N^^ H     N 1-(1H-Pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)- 1H-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid ethyl ester 256 1 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 5 Nd N N   H 4-(3-Methyl-4-phenyl-pyrazol-1 -yl)- 1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine 274 1 6 0. 4-(3-Phenyl-pyrazol-1 -yl)- 1H-pyrrolo [2,3-b]pyridine 260 1 7 Br d N N ' N N   H 4-(4-Bromo-imidazol-1 -yl)- 1H-pyrrolo [2,3-b]pyridine 262 13 8 tt N N   H 4-(4-Bromo-3-methyl-pyrazol-1 -yl)- 1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine 262 1 9 C= / CN NT? N N N   H 3 -[3-Methyl- 1-(1H-pyrrolo [2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]-benzonitrile 299 1 10 o z 4-[3-Methyl-1-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]-benzonitrile 299 1 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 16 F N~~2 N n N   H 4-[4-(3-Fluoro-phenyl)-3-methyl-pyrazol-1 -yl]-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine 292 1 17 LL o 4-[4-(3,5-Bis-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-3-methyl-pyrazol-1-yl]-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine 410 1 18 5 e v T| 4-[4-(3,5-Difluoro-phenyl)-3-methyl-pyrazol-1 -yl] -1H-pyrrolo [2,3-b]pyridine 310 1 19 I o {3-[3-Methyl- 1-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]-phenyl}-methanol 304 1 20 NN^ N N~2 N oo N H 4-(3-Methyl-4-pyrimidin-5-yl-pyrazol-1 -yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]-pyridine 276 1 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 21 1 / ~~\N? 13^ N N   H 4-[3-Methyl-4-(1 -methyl-1H-indol-5-yl)-pyrazol-1 -yl] -1H-pyrrolo [2,3-b]pyridine 327 1 22 S O Nr^ N ¢13 N H 4-(3-Methyl-4-thiophen-3-yl-pyrazol-1 -yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]-pyridine 280 1 23 0 > S-0 N”i N O3 N   H N,N-Dimethyl-4-[3 -methyl-1 -(1H-pyrrolo [2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]-benzenesulfonamide 381 1 24 0 NH N~2 N (33 N H N-{4-[3-Methyl-1-(1H-pyrrolo [2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)- 1H-pyrazol-4-yl]-phenyl}-acetamide 331 1 26 —e- CN Ni N (33 '"n " N N   H 3 -tert-Butyl- 1-(1H-pyrrolo [2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)- 1H-pyrazole-4-carbonitrile 265 1 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 27 NC    Br N N 03 N   N N   H 4-Bromo- 1-(1H-pyrrolo [2,3-b]-pyridin-4-yl)- 1H-pyrazole-3-carbonitrile 287 1 28 \  7 cn NC   >= / N N cx^ N   H 4-(3-Cyano-phenyl)- 1-(1H-pyrrolo [2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)- 1H-pyrazole-3-carbonitrile 310 1 29 HO F   ( F-^F 2 N N q5 N'^ N N   H 3-[1-(1H-Pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-3-trifluoromethyl- IH-pyrazol-4-yl]-propan-1-ol 254 1 30 CH2OH y N N   H 3 -[3-Methyl- 1-(1H-pyrrolo [2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]-prop-2-en-1-ol 310 1 31 Or o N     Br 0 N^ N fy0 N N   H 2-[4-Bromo-1-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)- 1H-pyrazol-3-yl]-isoindole- 1,3-dione 408 1 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 32 Nr^^ N N H 4-[4-(2,6-Dimethyl-phenyl)-3-methyl-pyrazol-1 -yl] -1H-pyrrolo [2,3-b]pyridine 302 1 33 \ r~ cn H2N N”? N ¢0 3-[3-Amino-1-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]-benzonitrile 300 1 34 CH2Ph 1 CN HN Nt> N o3 N H 3-[3-Benzylamino-1-(1H-pyrrolo [2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)- 1H-pyrazol-4-yl] -benzonitrile 390 1, 15 35 S— / "V /  \   / -CN HN    / --7 N> N "'N' N N   H N-[4-(3-Cyano-phenyl)- 1-(1H-pyrrolo [2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)- 1H-pyrazol-3-yl]-acetamide 342 1, 14 36 OH N-N / 2 03 V n N   H 3-[4-(1H-Pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-pyrazol-1 -yl]-propan-1 -ol 242 58 Purification A 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 37 OH N-N / y 03 N   H 3-[4-(1H-Pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-pyrazol-1 -yl]-butan-1 -ol 256 58 Purification A 38 CN N-N / A 03 N   N N   H 4-[4-(1H-Pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-pyrazol-1 -yl] -pentanenitrile 265 59 Purification A 39 Ox y- NH2 N-N / A 03 ''n^ n N   H 4-[4-(1H-Pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-pyrazol-1-yl]-pentanoic acid amide 283 60 Purification A 41 N. o N- N-N / A 03 N   N N   H 4-[1 -(3-Imidazol-1 -yl-1 -methylpropyl)- 1H-pyrazol-4-yl]- 1H-pyrrolo [2,3-b]pyridine 306 42 43 CN O ^N-7J / A 03 N   H 4-Cyclopentyl-4-[4-( 1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-pyrazol-1 -yl] -butyronitrile 319 59 Purification A 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 44 Ox y- nh2 ‘— /   N-N / A uj N   H 4-Cyclopentyl-4-[4-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-pyrazol-1 -yl] -butyramide 337 60 Purification A 45 ,- CN N-N / A N   H 3-Cyclopropyl-3- [4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-pyrazol-1 -yl] -propionitrile 278 61 Purification A Example 46: 4-(2-tert-Butyl-1-methyl-1H-imidazol-4-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine trifluoroacetate salt 5 Step 1. 4-(2-tert-butyl-1H-imidazol-5-yl)-1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine To a solution of trimethylacetic acid (0.169 mL, 0.00147 mol) in ethanol (6 mL, 0.1 mol) was added cesium carbonate (0.24 g, 0.00073 mol), and the resulting mixture was stirred for 2 hours. The solvent was removed in vacuo to afford cesium pivalate. 10           To a solution of 2-chloro-1-(1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4- yl)ethanone (prepared, e.g., as in Ex. 50, Step 1) (0.054 g, 0.00017 mol) in DMF (1.8 mL, 0.023 mol) was added cesium pivalate (0.0389 g, 0.000166 mol) and the reaction was stirred at room temperature for 16 hours. Ammonium acetate (0.45 g, 0.0058 mol) was added, and the reaction was heated in the microwave to 170 °C for 5 minutes. Water was added and the product was extracted with MTBE. The 15 combined organic extracts were dried over sodium sulfate, then filtered and concentrated. The crude residue was purified by flash column chromatography (2.5% MeOH / DCM) to yield 4-(2-tert-butyl-1H-imidazol-5-yl)-1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (32 mg, 52%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCh): 8 _8.31 (d, 1H), 7.50 (s, 1H), 7.40 (d, 1H), 7.37 (d, 1H), 6.94 (d, 1H), 5.69 (s, 2H), 3.52 (dd, 2H), 1.46 (s, 9H), 0.90 (dd, 2H), -0.08 (s, 9H); MS(ES):371(M+1). 20 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 Step 2. 4-(2-tert-butyl-1-methyl-1H-imidazol-4-yl)-1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo-[2,3-b]pyridine To a mixture of 4-(2-tert-butyl-1H-imidazol-5-yl)-1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (0.019 g, 0.000051 mol) and potassium carbonate (0.15 g, 0.0011 mol) in 5 DMF (3 mL, 0.04 mol) was added methyl iodide (0.01 mL, 0.00015 mol) in two portions over 48 hours. Water was then added and the product was extracted with MTBE. The combined extracts were dried with sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo, then purified by silica gel chromatography (20% ethyl acetate / hexanes) to afford 4-(2-tert-butyl-1-methyl-1H-imidazol-4-yl)-1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (10 mg, 51%). 10   1HNMR (400 MHz, CDCI3): 8 _8.37 (d, 1H), 7.54 (d, 1H), 7.44-7.22 (m, 2H), 7.19 (d, 1H), 5.78 (s, 2H), 3.93 (s, 3H), 3.60 (dd, 2H), 1.61 (s, 9H), 0.98 (dd, 2H), 0.00 (s, 9H); MS(ES):385(M+1). Step 3. A solution of 4-(2-tert-butyl-1-methyl-1H-imidazol-4-yl)-1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)-ethoxy]-15 methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (0.010 g, 0.000026 mol) in TFA (3 mL, 0.04 mol) was stirred for 2 hours. Then the excess TFA was evaporated and the residue was stirred in methanol (3 mL, 0.07 mol) and NH4OH (1 mL) for 16 hours. The solvents were removed and the product was purified by preparative-HPLC (C18 eluting with a gradient of ACN / H2O containing 0.1% TFA) to afford 4-(2-tert-butyl-1-methyl-1H-imidazol-4-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine, trifluoroacetate salt (9 mg, 90%). 20   1H NMR (400 MHz, d6-DMSO): 8 _ 12.24 (s, 1H), 8.38 (br s, 1H), 8.24 (s, 1H), 7.70-7.63 (m, 2H), 7.08 (br s, 1H), 2.55 (s, 3H), 1.51 (s, 9H); MS(ES):255(M+1). Additional analogs were prepared as shown in Table 2 using analogous procedures to those described in Example 46 with different starting materials such as alternative carboxylic acids in Step 1. When the analogs were obtained as the free base, the product was obtained by preparative-HPLC 25   (C18 eluting with a gradient of ACN / H2O containing 0.15% NH4OH). The results are summarized in Table 2 according to the following structure: (Y)n-Z Table 2 Ex. No. Name -(Y)n-Z MS (ES) (M+1) 47 4-(2-phenyl- 1H-imidazol-5-yl)- 1H-pyrrolo [2,3-b]pyridine vO 261 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 48 4-(2-benzyl- 1H-imidazol-5-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine trifluoroacetate salt 275 49 4-[2-(1 -phenylethyl)- 1H-imidazol-5-yl]-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine trifluoroacetate salt (racemic) 289 Example 50: 4-(2-Phenyl-1,3-thiazol-4-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine trifluoroacetate salt Step 1. 2-Chloro-1-(1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)ethanone 5           To a solution of 4-bromo-1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (2.05 g, 0.00626 mol) in THF (10 mL, 0.123 mol) at 0 °C was added dropwise a solution of isopropylmagnesium chloride in ether (2.0 M, 9.4 mL). The mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred for 4 hours. This mixture was then transferred via cannula to a solution of 2-chloro-N-methoxy-N-methylacetamide (2.84 g, 0.0207 mol) in THF (10 ml). After 30 minutes 10 reaction time, the solution was quenched by the addition of saturated ammonium chloride aqueous solution. The product was extracted with ethyl acetate, the combined organic extracts were washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated. The crude residue was purified by flash column chromatography (0-20% ethyl acetate / hexanes) to afford 2-chloro-1-(1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)-ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)ethanone (711 mg, 35%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): 15    8 _8.56 (d, 1H), 7.66 (d, 1H), 7.60 (d, 1H), 7.23 (d, 1H), 5.80 (s, 2H), 4.91 (s, 2H), 3.60 (dd, 2H), 0.98 (dd, 2H), 0.01 (s, 9H); MS(ES):325(M+1). Step 2. 4-(2-Phenyl-1,3-thiazol-4-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine trifluoroacetate salt A solution of 2-chloro-1-(1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-20 ethanone (0.050 g, 0.00015 mol) and benzenecarbothioamide (0.031 g, 0.00022 mol) in ethanol (2 mL, 0.03 mol) was heated to reflux for 1 hour. The solvent was removed in vacuo. Ethyl acetate was added, and the resulting solid was isolated by filtration. The crude solid was stirred with TFA for 1 hour, then excess TFA was removed in vacuo. The crude residue was then stirred with aq. NH4OH and MeOH for 16 hours. The solvent was removed and the product was purified by preparative-HPLC 25   (C18 eluting with a gradient of ACN / H2O containing 0.1% TFA) to afford 4-(2-phenyl-1,3-thiazol-4- 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine as the trifluoroacetate salt (11 mg, 18%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, d6-DMSO): 8 _ 12.01 (s, 1H), 8.58 (s, 1H), 8.39 (br s, 1H), 8.13-8.07 (m, 2H), 7.81 (d, 1H), 7.67-7.64 (m, 1H), 7.62-7.52 (m, 3H), 7.22 (d, 1H); MS(ES):278(M+1). 5 Example 51: N-Methyl-N-propyl-4-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1,3-thiazol-2-amine, trifluoroacetate salt Step 1. N-Methyl-N-propylthiourea 10           N-Methyl-N-propylamine (0.501 mL, 0.00488 mol) was added to a solution of 1,1'- thiocarbonyldiimidazole (0.957 g, 0.00537 mol) in THF (9 mL, 0.1 mol), and the resulting solution was stirred for 16 hours. The intermediate from the reaction mixture was isolated by silica gel chromatography (5% MeOH in DCM) and this intermediate was stirred with ammonia (7M solution in MeOH) (6 mL) for 48 hours. The solvent was removed in vacuo. N-methyl-N-propylthiourea was 15 obtained after flash column chromatography (4% MeOH in DCM). Step 2. A solution of 2-chloro-1-(1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-ethanone (0.050 g, 0.00015 mol) and N-methyl-N-propylthiourea (0.030 g, 0.00022 mol) in ethanol (2 20 mL, 0.03 mol) was heated to reflux for 2 hours. Then, the ethanol was removed in vacuo and the residue was dissolved in 2 mL TFA and stirred for 40 minutes. The excess TFA was removed in vacuo and the residue was dissolved in 3 mL of MeOH. To this was added 0.5 mL of NH4OH and 100 ^L of ethylenediamine, and the resulting solution was stirred for 16 hours. Solvent was removed, then water was added to give a white precipitate which was purified by preparative-HPLC (C18 eluting 25 with a gradient of ACN / H2O containing 0.1% TFA) to afford N-methyl-N-propyl-4-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1,3-thiazol-2-amine as the trifluoroacetate salt (39 mg, 67%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, CD3OD): 8 _8.46-8.12 (br s, 1H), 7.92 (br s, 1H), 7.72 (s, 1H), 7.63 (d, 1H), 7.45 (br s, 1H), 3.56 (t, 2H), 3.20 (s, 3H), 1.78 (dq, 2H), 1.00 (t, 3H); MS(ES):273(M+1). Additional aminothiazole analogs were prepared by procedures analogous to those described 30 in Example 51, using different starting materials such as alternative thioureas in Step 2. In Examples 52 and 53, the white precipitate obtained by the procedure of Example 51 was isolated by filtration, 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 washed with water and dried under high vacuum to afford the analogs as the free amine. The results are summarized in Table 3 according to the following structure: (Y)n-Z Table 3 Ex. No. Name R MS (ES) (M+1) 52 N-phenyl-4-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)- 1,3-thiazol-2-amine H V Nvz'\ 293 53 N-methyl-N-phenyl-4-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)- 1,3-thiazol-2-amine । V N"-X'^ 307 Example 54: 4-(2-Phenyl-1,3-thiazol-5-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine trifluoroacetate salt 10 15 20 Step 1. (2-Phenyl-1,3-thiazol-5-yl)boronic acid To a solution of n-butyllithium in hexane (1.6 M, 2.1 mL) in ether (20 mL) at -78 °C, a solution of 2-phenyl-1,3-thiazole (449 mg, 0.00278 mol) in ether (5 mL) was added dropwise. The mixture was stirred for one hour at -78 °C followed by the addition of boric acid trimethyl ester (0.949 mL, 0.00835 mol). The mixture was stirred at -78 °C for 15 minutes, then was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred for an additional 40 minutes. Saturated NH4Cl aqueous solution was added, followed by 1.0 N aqueous HCl. The acidified mixture was stirred for 15 minutes, and the desired product was extracted with four portions of DCM containing 15% isopropanol. The combined organic extracts were dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated to give 566 mg of a white solid containing the desired (2-phenyl-1,3-thiazol-5-yl)boronic acid as a mixture with 2-phenyl-1,3-thiazole. This mixture was used in Step 2 without further purification. MS(ES):206(M+1). 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 Step 2. To a mixture of (2-phenyl-1,3-thiazol-5-yl)boronic acid (75.0 mg, 0.000366 mol) and 4-bromo-1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (80 mg, 0.000244 mol) in DMF (4 mL, 0.0516 mol) was added a solution of potassium carbonate (101 mg, 0.000732 mol) in water (1 5 mL, 0.0555 mol). The mixture was purged with a steady stream of nitrogen for 15 minutes. Tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) (20 mg, 0.000018 mol) was added and the resulting mixture was heated to 125 °C for 30 minutes. The product was purified by preparative-HPLC (C18 eluting with a gradient of ACN / H2O containing 0.1% TFA) to afford 12 mg of a yellow solid containing the desired product as the major component. The mixture was stirred in TFA (1 mL) for 1 10 hour. Then excess TFA was removed in vacuo and the resulting residue was stirred with 2 mL MeOH, 0.5 mL NH4OH and 100 pL ethylenediamine for 16 hours. The product was isolated by preparative-HPLC (C18 eluting with a gradient of ACN / H2O containing 0.1% TFA) to afford 4-(2-phenyl-1,3-thiazol-5-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine trifluoroacetate salt (5 mg, 5%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CD3OD): 8 J8.64 (s, 1H), 8.34 (d, 1H), 8.10-8.04 (m, 2H), 7.73 (d, 1H), 7.71 (d, 1H), 7.56-7.51 (m, 15   3H), 7.14 (d, 1H); MS(ES):278(M+1). Example 55: Ethyl 2-methyl-2-[4-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]propanoate trifluoroacetate salt (55a) AND 20   2-Methyl-2-[4-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]propanoic acid (55b) 4-(1H-Pyrazol-4-yl)-1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (60 mg, 0.00019 mol) was dissolved in DMF (1.5 mL), and the solution was cooled to 0 °C with a cold bath. Sodium hydride (15 mg, 0.00038 mol) was added. After stirring for 10 min, 2-bromo-2-methyl- 25 propanoic acid ethyl ester (42 p,L, 0.00028 mol) was added. The cold bath was then removed and the reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature over 1 hour. The reaction mixture was quenched with saturated ammonium chloride solution. More water was added, and the product was extracted with MTBE. The combined extracts were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated. The residue was dissolved in 2 mL TFA and stirred for 1 h. Then excess TFA was 30 removed in vacuo and the resulting residue was stirred in 2 mL EtOH containing 0.6 mL NH4OH solution for 16 hours. Volatiles were removed, and purification of the mixture was carried out via preparative-HPLC (C18 eluting with a gradient of ACN / H2O containing 0.1% TFA) afforded ethyl 2- 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 methyl-2-[4-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]propanoate trifluoroacetate salt (13 mg, 17%): 1H NMR (300 MHz, d6-DMSO): 8 _ 12.03 (s, 1H), 8.67 (s, 1H), 8.31-8.19 (m, 2H), 7.59 (t, 1H), 7.48 (d, 1H), 6.98 (br s, 1H), 4.10 (q, 2H), 1.84 (s, 6H), 1.12 (t, 3H); MS(ES):299(M+1) and 2-methyl-2-[4-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]propanoic acid (27 mg, 53%): 1H NMR 5    (300 MHz, d6-DMSO): 8 _ 12.04 (s, 1H), 8.64 (s, 1H), 8.26 (s, 2H), 7.59 (br s, 1H), 7.48 (d, 1H), 6.99 (br s, 1H), 1.83 (s, 6H); MS(ES):271(M+H). Example 56: 2-Methyl-2-[4-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]propanamide 10 A mixture of 2-methyl-2-[4-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]propanoic acid (23 mg, 0.000085 mol) and N,N-carbonyldiimidazole (CDI) (21 mg, 0.00013 mol) in 2 mL of DMF was stirred for 3 hours. An excess of solid NH4Cl and TEA was added to the mixture and this was stirred for 3 hours. The majority of solvent was removed in vacuo, and the crude residue was purified 15 by preparative-HPLC (C18 eluting with a gradient of ACN / H2O containing 0.1% TFA) followed by re-purification via preparative-HPLC (C18 eluting with a gradient of ACN / H2O containing 0.15% NH4OH) to afford 2-methyl-2-[4-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]propanamide (6 mg, 26%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, d6-DMSO): 8 _ 11.63 (s, 1H), 8.44 (s, 1H), 8.16 (s, 1H), 8.14 (s, 1H), 7.47 (t, 1H), 7.29 (d, 1H), 7.21 (s, 1H), 6.93 (s, 1H), 6.80 (dd, 1H), 1.77 (s, 6H); MS(ES):270(M+1). 20 Example 57: Ethyl 3-methyl-3-[4-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]butanoate trifluoroacetate salt Step 1. Ethyl 3-methyl-3-[4-(1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H- 25 pyrazol-1-yl]butanoate 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 4-(1H-Pyrazol-4-yl)-1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (220 mg, 0.0006996 mol) and 3-methyl-2-butenoic acid ethyl ester (292 ^L, 0.00210 mol) were dissolved in DMF (10 mL). Cesium carbonate (912 mg, 0.00280 mol) was added and the resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours. The reaction mixture was diluted with water, and the product 5 was extracted with MTBE several times. The combined extracts were dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated. The crude residue was purified by flash column chromatography (0-60% EtOAc / Hexanes) to afford ethyl 3-methyl-3-[4-(1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]butanoate (244 mg, 79%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCh): 8 _8.37 (d, 1H), 8.11 (s, 1H), 8.09 (s, 1H), 7.45 (d, 1H), 7.24 (d, 1H), 6.79 (d, 1H), 5.77 (s, 2H), 4.10 (q, 2H), 10    3.62 (dd, 2H), 3.04 (s, 2H), 1.88 (s, 6H), 1.20 (t, 3H), 0.98 (dd, 2H), 0.00 (s, 9H); MS(ES):443(M+1). Step 2. Ethyl 3-methyl-3-[4-(1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]butanoate (20 mg, 0.0000452 mol) was stirred in 1 mL TFA for 1 hour. Then excess 15 TFA was removed in vacuo. The residue was stirred for 16 hours in 2 mL MeOH containing 0.5 mL NH4OH. Evaporation of the volatiles was followed by purification by preparative-HPLC (C18 eluting with a gradient of ACN / H2O containing 0.1% TFA) to afford ethyl 3-methyl-3-[4-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]-pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]butanoate, trifluoroacetate salt (5 mg, 26%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, d6-DMSO): 8 J 12.19 (s, 1H), 8.61 (br s, 1H), 8.34-8.22 (br m, 2H), 7.62 (br s, 1H), 7.51 (br d, 1H), 7.02 20 (br s, 1H), 3.91 (q, 2H), 2.96 (s, 2H), 1.70 (s, 6H), 1.02 (t, 3H); MS(ES):313(M+1). Example 58: 3-Methyl-3-[4-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]butan-1-ol trifluoroacetate salt 25           To a solution of ethyl 3-methyl-3-[4-(1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]- pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]butanoate (213 mg, 0.000481 mol) in THF (5 mL, 0.0616 mol) at -78 °C was added diisobutylaluminum hydride in DCM (1.00 M, 1.1 mL) dropwise. The reaction mixture was stirred for 3 hours during which time the reaction slowly warmed to -10 °C. To the mixture at -10 °C was carefully added K / Na tartrate tetrahydrate in water. The mixture was stirred for 30    2 hours, then was extracted with three portions of ethyl acetate. The combined organic extracts were washed with two portions of water and one portion of brine, then dried over sodium sulfate, filtered 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 and concentrated to afford 3-methyl-3-[4-(1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]-pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]butan-1-ol (185 mg, 96%), which was used without further purification. A portion of the alcohol so obtained (15 mg, 0.000037 mol) was stirred in TFA (1 mL) for 2 hours. The TFA was removed in vacuo and the residue was stirred with 2 mL MeOH containing 5   0.5 mL NH4OH for 16 hours. Volatiles were removed and the product was purified by preparative- HPLC (C18 eluting with a gradient of ACN / H2O containing 0.1% TFA) to afford 3-methyl-3-[4-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]butan-1-ol as the trifluoroacetate salt (8.0 mg, 57%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, d6-DMSO): 8 _ 12.17 (s, 1H), 8.58 (br s, 1H), 8.32-8.22 (br m, 2H), 7.62 (br s, 1H), 7.53 (br d, 1H), 7.03 (br s, 1H), 3.25 (t, 2H), 2.07 (t, 2H), 1.62 (s, 6H); MS(ES):271(M+1). 10 Example 59: 4-Methyl-4-[4-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]pentanenitrile trifluoroacetate salt Step 1. 4-Methyl-4-[4-(1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-15 pyrazol-1-yl]pentanenitrile TEA (38.0 pL, 0.000273 mol) and methanesulfonyl chloride (21.1 pL, 0.000273 mol) were added sequentially to a solution of 3-methyl-3-[4-(1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]butan-1-ol (prepared as in Example 58) (81 mg, 0.00020 mol) in DCM (4 mL, 0.05 mol) at 0° C. The reaction mixture was held at this temperature for 1.5 hours, then 20 was quenched by the addition of water. The reaction mixture was extracted with DCM four times. The combined extracts were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated to afford crude 3-methyl-3-[4-(1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]butyl methanesulfonate (87 mg). MS(ES):479(M+1). A mixture of 3-methyl-3-[4-(1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-25 yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]butyl methanesulfonate (42 mg, 0.000088 mol) and potassium cyanide (46 mg, 0.000702 mol) in DMF (1 mL) was heated in the microwave reactor for 30 min at 125 °C followed by additional 30 min at 135 °C. The mixture was then diluted with water, and the product was extracted with three portions of MTBE. The combined extracts were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated to give 61 mg of crude 4-methyl-4-[4-(1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo-30 [2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]pentanenitrile, which was used without further purification. MS(ES):410(M+1). 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 Step 2. 4-Methyl-4-[4-(1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]pentanenitrile (57 mg, 0.00014 mol) was stirred in DCM (4 ml) and TFA (1 mL) for 2 hours. The solvents were removed in vacuo and the residue was stirred in 2 mL MeOH containing 0.2 5 mL ethylenediamine for 16 hours. The volatiles were evaporated and the product was isolated from the reaction mixture by preparative-HPLC (C18 eluting with a gradient of ACN / H2O containing 0.1% TFA) affording 4-methyl-4-[4-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]pentanenitrile as the trifluoroacetate salt (10 mg, 18%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, d6-DMSO): 8 J 12.09 (s, 1H), 8.58 (s, 1H), 8.29 (s, 1H), 8.25 (d, 1H), 7.60 (t, 1H), 7.48 (d, 1H), 7.00 (br s, 1H), 2.33-2.21 (m, 4H), 1.61 (s, 6H); 10   MS(ES):280(M+1). Example 60: 4-Methyl-4-[4-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]pentanamide trifluoroacetate salt 15           The crude 4-methyl-4-[4-(1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)- 1H-pyrazol-1-yl]pentanenitrile (36 mg, 0.000088 mol, see preparation in Example 59), was stirred in TFA (2 mL) for 1 hour. The mixture was concentrated to remove excess TFA, and the resulting residue was stirred in 2 mL methanol containing 0.5 mL NH4OH for 16 hours. The product was purified by preparative-HPLC (C18 eluting with a gradient of ACN / H2O containing 0.1% TFA) to 20 afford 4-methyl-4-[4-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]pentanamide as the trifluoroacetate salt (21 mg, 58%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, d6-DMSO): 8 _ 12.18 (s, 1H), 8.60 (s, 1H), 8.33-8.21 (m, 2H), 7.62 (br s, 1H), 7.53 (d, 1H), 7.22 (br s, 1H), 7.04 (br s, 1H), 6.71 (br s, 1H), 2.14-2.07 (m, 2H), 1.86-1.79 (m, 2H), 1.58 (s, 6H); MS(ES):298(M+1). 25 Example 61: (3S)-3-[4-(1H-Pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]butanenitrile trifluoroacetate salt , AND (3R)-3-[4-(1H-Pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]butanenitrile trifluoroacetate salt N-N 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 To a solution of 4-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (0.050 g, 0.00016 mol) in ACN were added 2-butenenitrile (0.014 mL, 0.00017 mol) and 5 DBU (0.029 mL, 0.00020 mol). The resulting mixture was stirred for 16 hours. Then the volatiles were evaporated and the residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate. The resulting solution was washed successively with 1.0 N HCl, water, and brine, then was dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated. To obtain the enantiomers in substantially pure form, Method A (vide infra) was used. The crude residue was dissolved in TFA (7 mL, 0.09 mol) and the solution was stirred for 1 10 hour. Then excess TFA was evaporated and the residue was then stirred with ethylenediamine (0.1 mL, 0.001 mol) in methanol (4 mL, 0.09 mol) for 16 hours. The mixture was concentrated, and the product was purified by preparative-HPLC (C18 eluting with a gradient of ACN / H2O containing 0.1% TFA) to afford 3-[4-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]butanenitrile trifluoroacetate salt (35 mg, 61%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, d6-DMSO): 8 _ 12.16 (s, 1H), 8.73 (s, 1H), 8.32 (s, 1H), 8.28 15    (d, 1H), 7.65-7.61 (m, 1H), 7.48 (d, 1H), 6.99 (d, 1H), 4.86 (q, 1H), 3.17 (d, 2H), 1.57 (d, 3H); MS(ES):252(M+1). Additional analogs were prepared by procedures analogous to those described in Example 61 using different starting materials for alkylation of the pyrazole ring. For example, the a,p-unsaturated nitriles were prepared by procedures analogous to the following, illustrated for (2E)- and (2Z)- 20 hexenenitrile: To a solution of 1.00 M potassium tert-butoxide in THF at 0 oC (24.2 mL) was added a solution of diethyl cyanomethylphosphonate (4.10 mL, 0.025 mol) in THF (30 mL) dropwise. The bath was removed and the solution was allowed to warm to room temperature. After reaching room temperature, the solution was re-cooled to 0o C and a solution of butanal (2.00 mL, 0.023 mol) in THF (7 mL) was added dropwise. The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature 25 and stir overnight. The mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate and water. The layers were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted with three portions of ethyl acetate. The combined organic extracts were washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated. This afforded 1.6 g of a crude mixture containing both (2E)- and (2Z)-hexenenitrile, which was used without further purification in the subsequent alkylation step. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDQ3): 8  6.72 (dt, 1H trans 30 olefin), 6.48 (dt, 1H cis olefin), 5.34 (dt, 1H trans olefin), 5.31-5.30 (m, 1H cis olefin). Where it was desirable to obtain the enantiomers in substantially pure form, chiral separation was performed by one of the following methods: 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 A) The separation was performed on the SEM-protected intermediate after silica gel chromatography (ethyl acetate / hexanes) by preparative chiral HPLC (OD-H column, eluting with 15% ethanol in hexanes); B) The separation was performed on the deprotected free base by preparative chiral HPLC 5 (OD-H column, eluting with 15% ethanol in hexanes); C) The separation was performed on the SEM-protected intermediate after silica gel chromatography (ethyl acetate / hexanes) by preparative chiral HPLC (AD-H column, eluting with 10% ethanol in hexanes); D) The separation was performed on the SEM-protected intermediate after silica gel 10   chromatography (ethyl acetate / hexanes) by preparative chiral HPLC (AD-H column, eluting with 15% ethanol in hexanes); E) The separation was performed on the SEM-protected intermediate after silica gel chromatography (ethyl acetate / hexanes) by preparative chiral HPLC (OD-H column, eluting with 20% ethanol in hexanes; or 15           F) The separation was performed on the SEM-protected intermediate after silica gel chromatography (ethyl acetate / hexanes) by preparative chiral HPLC (OD-H column, eluting with 30% ethanol in hexanes. An OD-H column refers to Chiralcel OD-H from Chiral Technologies, Inc 3x25 cm, 5 pm. An AD-H column refers to ChiralPak AD-H from Chiral Technologies, Inc. 2x25 cm, 5 pm. The results are summarized for compounds in Table 4 below. 20 Table 4 Ex. No. Name R MS (ES) (M+1) Method of preparation and chiral separation 62 3-[4-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)- 1H-pyrazol-1 -yl]propanenitrile trifluoroacetate salt H 238 Ex. 61 63 (3S)-3-[4-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)- 1H-pyrazol-1 -yl]hexanenitrile trifluroracetate salt and (3R)-3-[4-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)- 1H-pyrazol-1 -yl]hexanenitrile trifluroracetate salt Pr 280 Ex. 61 Method B 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 64 (3S)-3-cyclopentyl-3- [4-(1H-pyrrolo [2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)- 1H-pyrazol-1 -yl]-propanenitrile trifluoroacetate salt and (3R)-3-cyclopentyl-3-[4-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)- 1H-pyrazol-1 -yl]-propanenitrile trifluoroacetate salt 306 Ex. 61 Method C 64a (3S)-3-cyclohexyl-3- [4-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)- 1H-pyrazol-1 -yl]-propanenitrile and (3R)-3-cyclohexyl-3-[4-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)- 1H-pyrazol-1 -yl]-propanenitrile 320 Ex. 61 Method D Example 65: (3R)-3-[4-(7H-Pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]hexanenitrile trifluoroacetate salt and 5    (3S)-3-[4-(7H-Pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]hexanenitrile trifluoroacetate salt Step 1. 4-Chloro-7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidine To a solution of 4-chloropyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidine (0.86 g, 0.0056 mol) in DMF (20 mL, 0.2 mol) at 0 °C was added sodium hydride (0.27 g, 0.0067 mol) in several portions. The reaction mixture 10 was stirred for an additional 45 minutes followed by a dropwise addition of p-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]-methyl chloride (1.2 mL, 0.0067 mol). The resulting reaction mixture was stirred at 0 °C for 45 min, then was quenched with water and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic extract was washed with water, brine, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated to give an oil. The crude residue was purified by flash column chromatography (0-15% ethyl acetate / hexanes) to yield 4-chloro-7-[2-15 (trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidine (1.40 g, 88%). 1HNMR (400 MHz, CDCb): 8 _8.71 (s, 1H), 7.46 (d, 1H), 6.72 (d, 1H), 5.71 (s, 2H), 3.59 (dd, 2H), 0.97 (dd, 2H), 0.00 (s, 9H); MS(ES):284(M+1). Step 2. 4-(1H-Pyrazol-4-yl)-7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidine 20            To a mixture of 4-chloro-7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidine (1.4 g, 0.0049 mol) and 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole (1.4 g, 0.0074 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 mol) in DMF (40 mL, 0.5 mol) was added potassium carbonate (2.0 g, 0.015 mol) in 15 mL of water. The mixture was purged with a steady stream of nitrogen for 15 minutes. Tetrakis(triphenyl-phosphine)palladium(O) (0.41 g, 0.00036 mol) was added and the reaction was heated to 125 °C for 30 min. The mixture was allowed to cool then diluted with ethyl acetate. The diluted reaction mixture 5 was washed with water, brine, dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated to give a solution in a small volume of DMF (about 2-3 mL). Water was added, causing the material to form a gum on the walls of the flask. Then water was decanted, and the solids were dissolved in ethyl acetate. The solution was dried over Na2SO4, and concentrated in vacuo to afford a yellow solid. The product was triturated with ethyl ether to yield 4-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3- 10 d]pyrimidine as a white powder which was dried under vacuum (1g, 60%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCb): 8 10.80 (br s, 1H), 8.93 (s, 1H), 8.46 (s, 2H), 7.46 (d, 1H), 6.88 (d, 1H), 5.73 (s, 2H), 3.61 (dd, 2H), 0.98 (dd, 2H), 0.00 (s, 9H); MS(ES):316(M+1). Step 3. 15           To a solution of 4-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3- d]pyrimidine (0.050 g, 0.00016 mol) in ACN (1 mL, 0.02 mol) was added hex-2-enenitrile (0.100 g, 0.00105 mol) (as a mixture of cis and trans isomers), followed by DBU(60 p,L, 0.0004 mol). The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 hours. The ACN was removed in vacuo. The crude residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate, and was washed with 1.0 N HCl, brine, dried over 20   Na2SO4 and concentrated. The crude residue was purified by flash column chromatography (0-70% EtOAc / Hexane) to afford 56 mg of product, which was stirred with 1:1 TFA / DCM for 1 hour and the solvents were evaporated. The resulting product was stirred with methanol (4 mL, 0.1 mol) containing ethylenediamine (0.1 mL, 0.001 mol) overnight. The solvent was evaporated and the product was purified by preparative-HPLC (C18 eluting with a gradient of ACN / H2O containing 0.1% TFA) to 25 afford 3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]hexanenitrile as the trifluroacetate salt. Where desired, the enantiomers were isolated in substantially pure form by Method A described above for Example 61. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CD3OD): 8 8.93 (s, 1H), 8.88 (s, 1H), 8.52 (s, 1H), 7.85 (d, 1H), 7.28 (d, 1H), 4.87-4.77 (m, 1H), 3.26-3.05 (m, 2H), 2.20-2.05 (m, 1H), 2.00-1.86 (m, 1H), 1.40-1.10 (m, 2H), 0.95 (t, 3H); MS(ES):281(M+1). 30 35 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 Example 67: (3R)- and (3S)-3-Cyclopentyl-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol- 1-yl]propanenitrile CN                  CN N-N                   N-N a j                    n / ) and N'^A        N^S"-^ P J /                 0 J / N N               n N HH Step 1. (2E)- and (2Z)-3-Cyclopentylacrylonitrile 5           To a solution of 1.0 M potassium tert-butoxide in THF (235 mL) at 0 °C was added dropwise a solution of diethyl cyanomethylphosphonate (39.9 mL, 0.246 mol) in THF (300 mL). The cold bath was removed and the reaction was warmed to room temperature followed by recooling to 0 °C, at which time a solution of cyclopentanecarbaldehyde (22.0 g, 0.224 mol) in THF (60 mL) was added dropwise. The bath was removed and the reaction warmed to ambient temperature and stirred for 64 10 hours. The mixture was partitioned between diethyl ether and water, the aqueous was extracted with three portions of ether, followed by two portions of ethyl acetate. The combined extracts were washed with brine, then dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford a mixture containing 24.4 g of olefin isomers which was used without further purification (89%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3): 8 6.69 (dd, 1H, trans olefin), 6.37 (t, 1H, cis olefin), 5.29 (dd, 1H, trans 15 olefin), 5.20 (d, 1H, cis olefin), 3.07-2.95 (m, 1H, cis product), 2.64-2.52 (m, 1H, trans product), 1.981.26 (m, 16H). Step 2. (3R)- and (3S)-3-Cyclopentyl-3-[4-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]-pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]propanenitrile 20           To a solution of 4-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]- pyrimidine (15.0 g, 0.0476 mol) in ACN (300 mL) was added 3-cyclopentylacrylonitrile (15 g, 0.12 mol) (as a mixture of cis and trans isomers), followed by DBU (15 mL, 0.10 mol). The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The ACN was evaporated. The mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate, and the solution was washed with 1.0 N HCl. The organic layer was back- 25 extracted with three portions of ethyl acetate. The combined organic extracts were washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated. The crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (gradient of ethyl acetate / hexanes) to yield a viscous clear syrup, which was dissolved in ethanol and evaporated several times to remove ethyl acetate, to afford 19.4 g of racemic adduct (93%). The enantiomers were separated by preparative-HPLC, (OD-H, 15% ethanol / hexanes) 30 and used separately in the next step to generate their corresponding final product. The final products (see Step 3) stemming from each of the separated enantiomers were found to be active JAK inhibitors; 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 however, the final product stemming from the second peak to elute from the preparative-HPLC was more active than its enantiomer. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCI3): 8 8.85 (s, 1H), 8.32 (s, 2H), 7.39 (d, 1H), 6.80 (d, 1H), 5.68 (s, 2H), 4.26 (dt, 1H), 3.54 (t, 2H), 3.14 (dd, 1H), 2.95 (dd, 1H), 2.67-2.50 (m, 1H), 2.03-1.88 (m, 1H), 1.805    1.15 (m, 7H), 0.92 (t, 2H), -0.06 (s, 9H); MS(ES):437 (M+1). Step 3. To a solution of 3-cyclopentyl-3-[4-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]-pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]propanenitrile (6.5 g, 0.015 mol, R or S enantiomer as isolated 10 above) in DCM (40 mL) was added TFA (16 mL) and this was stirred for 6 hours. The solvent and TFA were removed in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in DCM and concentrated using a rotary evaporator two further times to remove as much as possible of the TFA. Following this, the residue was stirred with ethylenediamine (4 mL, 0.06 mol) in methanol (30 mL) overnight. The solvent was removed in vacuo, water was added and the product was extracted into three portions of ethyl acetate. 15 The combined extracts were washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate, decanted and concentrated to afford the crude product which was purified by flash column chromatography (eluting with a gradient of methanol / DCM). The resulting mixture was further purified by preparative-HPLC / MS (C18 eluting with a gradient of ACN / H2O containing 0.15% NH4OH) to afford product (2.68 g, 58%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, D6-dmso): 8 12.11 (br s, 1H), 8.80 (s, 1H), 8.67 (s, 1H), 8.37 (s, 1H), 7.60 (d, 20    1H), 6.98 (d, 1H), 4.53 (dt, 1H), 3.27 (dd, 1H), 3.19 (dd, 1H), 2.48-2.36 (m, 1H), 1.86-1.76 (m, 1H), 1.68-1.13 (m, 7H); MS(ES):307(M+1). In the alternative, (R)-3-cyclopentyl-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]propanenitrile can be prepared by the methods set out in WO2022 / 040180 (such as Examples 4, 5 25 and 6). The content of WO2022 / 040180 is herein incorporated by reference to the extent it is not inconsistent with the disclosures herein. Further in the alternative, (R)-3-cyclopentyl-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]propanenitrile can be prepared by the methods set out in WO2010 / 083283 at pages 170 to 173. The 30 content of WO2010 / 083283 is herein incorporated by reference to the extent it is not inconsistent with the disclosures herein. Example 67a:      (3R)-3-Cyclopentyl-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1- yl]propanenitrile 35           A solution of (E)-N-(3-(dimethylamino)-2-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)allylidene)-N- methylmethanaminium chloride hydrochloride (20.0 g, 55.8 mmol) in water (22.7 mL) was treated 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 with an 50% aqueous solution of NaOH at 0 - 5 oC to pH 7 - 8. The resulting aqueous solution was added charcoal (3.6 g) and the mixture was agitated at ambient temperature for 2 - 4 hours. Charcoal was removed by filtration through a Celite bed and the wet charcoal cake was washed with water (20 mL). The resulting aqueous solution, which contained (E)-N-(3-(dimethylamino)-2-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3- 5   d]pyrimidin-4-yl)allylidene)-N-methylmethanaminium chloride, was then treated with ethanol (160 mL) and (R)-3-cyclopentyl-3-hydrazinylpropanenitrile L-tartaric acid salt dihydrate (18.91 g, 55.8 mmol, 1.0 equiv) at ambient temperature. The resulting mixture was then agitated at ambient temperature for 12 - 24 hours. When the reaction was complete, the reaction mixture was filtered to remove the solids (L-tartaric acid). The cake was washed with ethanol (2 x 25 mL). The filtrate and 10 the wash solution were combined and the combined solution was concentrated under the reduced pressure at 40 - 50 oC to remove most of ethanol. The residue was then added H2O (70 mL) and dichloromethane (DCM, 200 mL). The two layers were separated, and the aqueous layer was extracted with DCM (80 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with an aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution (4% of aqueous NaHCO3 solution, 112 mL) and water (2 x 100 mL) and the 15 resulting solution, which contained the desired product, (R)-3-(4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)- 1H-pyrazol-1-yl)-3-cyclopentylpropanenitrile (Compound 67a), was concentrated under the reduced pressure and the residue (18.7 g, 17.1 g theoretical) was used for the subsequent phosphate salt formation reaction without further purification. For Compound 67a: 1H NMR (DMSO-d6, 400 MHz) 5 12.10 (br. s, 1H), 8.78 (s, 1H), 8.67 (s, 1H), 8.36 (s, 1H), 7.58 (dd, 1H, J = 2.3, 3.4 Hz), 6.97 (dd, 1H, 20 J = 1.5, 3.6 Hz), 4.50 (td, 1H, J = 9.7, 4.2 Hz), 3.26 (dd, 1H, J = 17.5, 10.2 Hz), 3.17 (dd, 1H, J = 17.2, 4.3 Hz), 2.40 (m, 1H), 1.78 (m, 1H), 1.85 - 1.10 (m, 7H) ppm; C17H18N6(MW, 306.37), LCMS (EI) m / e 307 (M+ + H). Example 67b:      (3R)-3-Cyclopentyl-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1- 25 yl]propanenitrile phosphate salt Crude (3R)-Cyclopentyl-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)pyrazol-1-yl]propionitrile phosphate (crude Compound 67b): Compound 67a          crude Compound 67b 30 A solution of crude (3R)-cyclopentyl-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)pyrazol-1- yl]propionitrile (Compound 67a free base, 18.7 g, 17.1 g theoretical, 55.8 mmol) generated from the previous process step in dichloromethane (DCM, 294 mL) and isopropanol (IPA, 12.8 mL) was heated to 36 °C before a solution of phosphoric acid (a 85% aqueous solution of H3PO4, 7.40 g, , 64.2 mmol, 1.15 equiv) in isopropanol (IPA, 12.7 mL) was added at 36 oC. A precipitate was formed almost immediately. The resulting mixture was then heated at 36 °C for 1 hour, then cooled gradually to ambient temperature and stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. The solids were collected by filtration, washed with DCM (2 x 50.8 mL) and n-heptane (22.6 mL), and dried in the vacuum oven at 40 - 45 °C to a constant weight to afford (3R)-cyclopentyl-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)pyrazol-1-yl]propionitrile phosphate (crude Compound 67b, 23.04 g, 22.56 g theoretical, 102% yield) as white to off-white crystalline powders, which contained some residual phosphoric acid and were purified by recrystallization in a mixture of methanol (MeOH), isopropanol (IPA), and n-heptane in the subsequent step. For crude Compound 67b: 1H NMR (DMSO-d6, 500 MHz) d ppm 12.10 (s, 1H), 8.78 (s, 1H), 8.68 (s, 1H), 8.36 (s 1H), 7.58 (dd, 1H, J = 1.9, 3.5 Hz), 6.97 (d, 1H, J = 3.6 Hz), 4.52 (td, 1H, J = 3.9, 9.7 Hz), 3.25 (dd, 1H, J = 9.8, 17.2 Hz), 3.16 (dd, 1H, J = 4.0, 17.0 Hz), 2.41, (m, 1H), 1.79 (m, 1H), 1.59 (m, 1H), 1.51 (m, 2H), 1.42 (m, 1H), 1.29 (m, 2H), 1.18 (m, 1H); 13C NMR (DMSO-d6, 125 MHz) d ppm 152.1, 150.8, 149.8, 139.2, 131.0, 126.8, 120.4, 118.1, 112.8, 99.8, 62.5, 44.3, 29.1, 29.0, 24.9, 24.3, 22.5; C17H18N6 (MW, 306.37 for free base) LCMS (EI) m / e 307 (M+ + H, base peak), 329.1 (M+ + Na). Purification of Crude Compound 67b: crude Compound 67b                   Compound 67b (3R)-Cyclopentyl-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)pyrazol-1-yl]propionitrilephosphate (Compound 67b) A suspension of the crude Compound 67b (40.0 g, 100 mmol) in methanol (MeOH, 520 mL) is heated to 50 - 60 oC to generate a homogenous solution. The solution is polish filtered at 50 - 60 oC. Methanol (287 mL) is partially distilled at atmosphere pressure at 60 - 70 oC before IPA (320 mL) is added to the mixture at the same temperature to initiate crystallization of the final product (Compound 67b). n-Heptane (1000 mL) is then added to the mixture at 60 - 70 oC and the distillation is continued at atmospheric pressure at 60 - 70 oC. Once the distillation is complete, the mixture is stirred at 60 - 70 oC for 10 - 60 minutes before being gradually cooled to room temperature and 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 stirred at room temperature for 3 - 6 hours. The solids are collected by filtration, washed sequentially with a mixture of IPA and n-heptane and n-heptane, and dried at 40 - 50 oC under vacuum to afford the final product, (Compound 67b, 39.4 g, 98.5%) as white crystalline powders. For Compound 67b: mp. 197.6 oC; 1H NMR (DMSO-d6, 500 MHz) d ppm 12.10 (s, 1H), 8.78 (s, 1H), 8.68 (s, 1H), 8.36 (s 5    1H), 7.58 (dd, 1H, J = 1.9, 3.5 Hz), 6.97 (d, 1H, J = 3.6 Hz), 4.52 (td, 1H, J = 3.9, 9.7 Hz), 3.25 (dd, 1H, J = 9.8, 17.2 Hz), 3.16 (dd, 1H, J = 4.0, 17.0 Hz), 2.41, (m, 1H), 1.79 (m, 1H), 1.59 (m, 1H), 1.51 (m, 2H), 1.42 (m, 1H), 1.29 (m, 2H), 1.18 (m, 1H); 13C NMR (DMSO-d6, 125 MHz) d ppm 152.1, 150.8, 149.8, 139.2, 131.0, 126.8, 120.4, 118.1, 112.8, 99.8, 62.5, 44.3, 29.1, 29.0, 24.9, 24.3, 22.5; C17H18N6 (MW, 306.37 for free base) LCMS (EI) m / e 307 (M+ + H, base peak), 329.1 (M+ + Na). 10 In the alternative, (R)-3-cyclopentyl-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]propanenitrile phosphoric acid salt can be prepared by the method set out in Example 2 of WO2008 / 157208. The content of WO2008 / 157208 is herein incorporated by reference to the extent it is not inconsistent with the disclosures herein. 15 Further in the alternative, (R)-3-cyclopentyl-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]propanenitrile phosphoric acid salt can be prepared by the methods set out in WO2010 / 083283 at pages 173 to 176. The content of WO2010 / 083283 is herein incorporated by reference to the extent it is not inconsistent with the disclosures herein. 20 Further in the alternative, (R)-3-cyclopentyl-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]propanenitrile maleic acid and sulfuric acid salts can be prepared by the methods set out in Examples 1 and 3 of WO2008 / 157208, respectively. The content of WO2008 / 157208 is herein incorporated by reference to the extent it is not inconsistent with the disclosures herein. 25 Additional analogs provided in the following Tables were prepared by procedures analogous to those described in, for example, Examples 61 and 65, using different starting materials such as different a,p-unsaturated nitriles in Step 3. Isolation of the enantiomers in substantially pure form was achieved by the indicated chiral separation method described above (A-F) preceding Table 4. 30 Where the product was isolated as the free amine, the product following deprotection was purified by preparative-HPLC (C18 eluting with a gradient of ACN / H2O containing 0.15% NH4OH) instead of preparative-HPLC (C18 eluting with a gradient of ACN / H2O containing 0.1% TFA). This is referred to as “modification G”. The results are summarized in Table 5 according to the following structure: 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 Table 5 Ex. No. Name R’, R’’ MS (ES) (M+1) Method of preparation and chiral separation 66 (3R)-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)- IH-pyrazol-1 -yl]butanenitrile trifluoroacetate salt and (3S)-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)- 1H-pyrazol-1 -yl]butanenitrile trifluoroacetate salt Me, H 253 Example 65, Method A 67 (3R)-3-cyclopentyl-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1 -yl]propanenitrile trifluoroacetate salt and (3S)-3-cyclopentyl-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1 -yl]propanenitrile trifluoroacetate salt ,H 307 Example 67 67a (3R)-3-cyclopentyl-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1 -yl]propanenitrile ,H — Example 67a 67b (3R)-3-cyclopentyl-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1 -yl]propanenitrile phosphoric acid salt ,H — Example 67b 68 2-methyl-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)- 1H-pyrazol-1 -yl]propanenitrile trifluoroacetate salt H, Me 253 Example 65, Not separated 68a (3R)-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl) - 1H-pyrazol-1 -yl]pentanenitrile and (3S)-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl) - 1H-pyrazol-1 -yl]pentanenitrile Et, H 267 Example 65, modification G, Method E 68b (3R)-5-methyl-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1 -yl]hexanenitrile and (3S)-5-methyl-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1 -yl]hexanenitrile ,H 295 Example 65, modification G, Method A 68c (3R)-3-cyclohexyl-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1 -yl]propanenitrile and (3S)-3-cyclohexyl-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1 -yl]propanenitrile ,h 321 Example 65, modification G, Method A 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 68d (3R)-4-cyclopropyl-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1 -yl]butanenitrile and (3S)-4-cyclopropyl-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1 -yl]butanenitrile J A ,H 279 Example 65, modification G, Method F Example 69: 4-{1-[(1S)-1-Methylbutyl]-1H-pyrazol-4-yl}-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidine trifluoroacetate salt and 5    4-{1-[(1R)-1-Methylbutyl]-1H-pyrazol-4-yl}-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidine trifluoroacetate salt A solution of 4-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]-pyrimidine (0.050 g, 0.00016 mol) in DMF (2 mL, 0.02 mol) was cooled in an ice bath and to this was added sodium hydride (0.013 g, 0.00032 mol). The resulting mixture was stirred for 10 minutes, 10 followed by an addition of 2-bromopentane (0.030 mL, 0.00024 mol). The cooling bath was then removed and the reaction was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours, at which time a further portion of 2-bromopentane (0.015 mL, 0.00012 mol) was added. After 45 minutes, water was added and the reaction mixture was extracted with three portions of ethyl acetate. The combined extracts were washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated. The residue was stirred with 15 TFA (3 mL, 0.04 mol) and DCM (3 mL, 0.05 mol) for 3.5 hours, then the solvent was removed in vacuo. The residue was then stirred with NH4OH (1.5 mL) in MeOH (4 mL) for 16 hours. The solvent was evaporated and the product was purified by preparative-HPLC (C18 eluting with a gradient of ACN / H2O containing 0.1% TFA) to afford 4-[1-(1-methylbutyl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidine as the trifluoroacetate salt (25 mg, 44%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, CD3OD): 8 8.83 (s, 1H), 20    8.75 (s, 1H), 8.43 (s, 1H), 7.77 (d, 1H), 7.24 (d, 1H), 4.63-4.50 (m, 1H), 2.07-1.91 (m, 1H), 1.88-1.74 (m, 1H), 1.58 (d, 3H), 1.38-1.09 (m, 2H), 0.93 (t, 3H); MS(ES):256(M+1). Isolation of the enantiomers in substantially pure form was achieved by separation of the racemic free base (isolated by flash column chromatography after deprotection, eluting with a MeOH / DCM gradient) using HPLC (OD-H, eluting with 5% isopropanol / hexanes). 25 Example 69a: 4-Methyl-4-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]pentanenitrile 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 Step 1. Ethyl 3-methyl-3-[4-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]butanoate A solution of  4-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]- 5 pyrimidine (12.1 g, 0.0384 mol), 2-butenoic acid, 3-methyl-, ethyl ester (16.0 mL, 0.115 mol) and DBU (14.3 mL, 0.0959 mol) in ACN (100 mL) was heated at reflux for 3.5 hours. The solvent was removed in vacuo. The residue was diluted with water, extracted with ethyl acetate, and the combined organic extracts were washed with saturated ammonium chloride, dried over sodium sulfate, and concentrated. The crude residue was purified by flash column chromatography (ethyl acetate / hexanes) 10 to yield the desired product (15.5 g, 91%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3): 8 _8.83 (s, 1H), 8.36 (s, 1H), 8.27 (s, 1H), 7.37 (d, 1H), 6.80 (d, 1H), 5.66 (s, 2H), 4.03 (q, 2H), 3.54 (dd, 2H), 2.98 (s, 2H), 1.80 (s, 6H), 1.13 (t, 3H), 0.91 (dd, 2H), -0.07 (s, 9H); MS(ES):444(M+1). 15 Step 2. 3-Methyl-3-[4-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]butan-1-ol To a solution of ethyl 3-methyl-3-[4-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]-pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]butanoate (15.4 g, 0.0347 mol) in THF (151 mL) at -78 °C was added 1.00 M diisobutylaluminum hydride in DCM (84.5 mL) dropwise. The reaction was stirred for 20   2 hours with slow warming to -10 °C. The mixture was quenched with water, then was treated with potassium sodium tartrate tetrahydrate and water. The mixture was stirred for 1 hour, then was extracted with ethyl acetate. The extracts were washed with water and brine, then dried with sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The crude residue was purified by flash column chromatography to yield the desired product (13.8 g, 99%). 25    1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3): 8 8.83 (s, 1H), 8.38 (s, 1H), 8.26 (s, 1H), 7.38 (d, 1H), 6.80 (d, 1H), 5.67 (s, 2H), 3.65 (dd, 2H), 3.54 (dd, 2H), 2.21 (t, 2H), 1.72 (s, 6H), 0.91 (dd, 2H), -0.07 (s, 9H); MS(ES):402(M+1). Step 3. 3-Methyl-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]butan-1-ol 30           A solution of 3-methyl-3-[4-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin- 4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]butan-1-ol (13.8 g, 0.0344 mol) in TFA (20 mL) was stirred for 1 hour. The 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 mixture was then concentrated in vacuo and the residue was stirred for 2 hours in a mixture of methanol (30 mL), ammonium hydroxide (30 mL), and ethylenediamine (8 mL). The mixture was then concentrated, and the residue was diluted with water and extracted with several portions of 15% IPA / CH2Cl2. The combined extracts were dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated in vacuo to give 5    20 g of white solid. The solid was triturated with ether and the product was isolated by filtration to give the product as a white solid (7.75 g, 83%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3): 8 _ 9.99 (s, 1H), 8.83 (s, 1H), 8.39 (s, 1H), 8.28 (s, 1H), 7.38 (dd, 1H), 6.80 (dd, 1H), 3.66 (t, 2H), 2.72 (br s, 1H), 2.22 (t, 2H), 1.74 (s, 6H); MS(ES):272(M+1). 10 Step 4. 3-Methyl-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]butyl methanesulfonate A solution of 3-methyl-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]butan-1-ol (6.61 g, 0.0244 mol) in DCM (300 mL) at 0 °C was treated with TEA (3.74 mL, 0.0268 mol), followed by methanesulfonyl chloride (2.07 mL, 0.0268 mol). The reaction was stirred for 1 hour, and was then concentrated in vacuo. The crude residue was purified by flash column chromatography 15 to afford the desired product (4.9 g, 57%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, d6-dmso): 8 _ 12.45 (s, 1H), 9.50 (s, 1H), 9.35 (s, 1H), 8.83 (s, 1H), 7.79 (dd, 1H), 7.11 (dd, 1H), 4.75 (t, 1H), 3.30 (s, 3H), 2.85 (t, 1H), 1.75 (s, 6H); MS(ES):254(M- CH3SO3H+1). 20 Step 5. 4-Methyl-4-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]pentanenitrile 3-methyl-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]butyl    methanesulfonate (2.97 g, 8.50 mmol), DMF (120 mL) and sodium cyanide (6.21 g, 0.127 mol) were distributed evenly into six 20 mL microwavable vessels, each of which was heated in the microwave reactor for 4000 seconds at 125 °C. The contents of the vials were combined and were diluted with 400 mL water 25 and extracted with five 150 mL portions of ethyl acetate. The combined extracts were dried over sodium sulfate, and the solvent was removed in vacuo. The crude residue was purified by flash column chromatography to yield the desired product (1.40 g, 59%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCb): 8 _9.52 (br s, 1H), 8.83 (s, 1H), 8.34 (s, 1H), 8.29 (s, 1H), 7.39 (dd, 1H), 6.81 (dd, 1H), 2.38 (dd, 2H), 2.16 (dd, 2H), 1.73 (s, 6H); MS(ES):281(M+1). 30           The analogs in Table 5a were prepared according to the above method described for Example 69a. For Example 69b, a conjugate acceptor was used and prepared as described in Perkin Trans. 1, 2000, (17), 2968-2976, and Steps 4&5 were performed before Step 3. Table 5a Ex. No. Structure Name MS (ES) (M+1) 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 F CN 69b N-N / / \ n^% 3-1-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]-pyrimidin-4-yl)- 1H-pyrazol-1 -yl]cyclopropylpropanenitrile 279 11 n"  H 69c \     CN ^Wv / N-N / / \ n'^yA (4S)- and (4R)-4-[4(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1 -yl]pentanenitrile 267 ^i\r" n N   H Example 69d: 3-Methyl-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]butanenitrile Step 1. Senecionitrile To a solution of 1.0 M potassium tert-butoxide in THF (2.0 mL) at 0 oC was added a solution of diethyl cyanomethylphosphonate (0.33 mL, 2.06 mmol) in THF (4 mL) dropwise. The cold bath 10 was removed and the reaction was warmed to room temperature. The reaction was then re-cooled to 0 oC and acetone (0.20 mL, 2.81 mmol) was added dropwise. The cooling bath was then removed and the reaction was allowed to warm to room temperature and stir overnight. The reaction was diluted with water, the layers separated, and the aqueous extracted with ethyl acetate. The extracts were washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated. The product was used without 15 further purification (339 mg, 67%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCI3): 8 _5.10 (br s, 1H), 2.05 (s, 3H), 1.92 (s, 3H). Step 2. 3-Methyl-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]butanenitrile To a solution of 4-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]- 20 pyrimidine (0.216 g, 0.684 mmol) in ACN (4 mL, 0.08 mol) was added crude senecionitrile (0.111 g, 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 1.37 mmol), followed by DBU (200 pL, 0.002 mol) and the resulting mixture was heated to 60 oC for 23 hours. The mixture was cooled to room temperature and the ACN was evaporated. The mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate and washed with dilute HCl and brine. The organic solution was dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated. Purification by silica gel chromatography (ethyl 5 acetate / hexanes) afforded the desired product. 1H NMR (300 MHz, d6-dmso): 8 _8.83 (s, 1H), 8.38 (s, 1H), 8.28 (s, 1H), 7.39 (d, 1H), 6.80 (d, 1H), 5.66 (s, 2H), 3.54 (dd, 2H), 3.08 (s, 2H), 1.84 (s, 6H), 0.91 (dd, 2H), -0.07 (s, 9H); MS(ES):397(M+1). To a solution of this product in DCM at 0 °C was added TFA sufficient to comprise 20% of 10 the total volume. The solution was stirred at this temperature for 30 min, then at ambient temperature for 2 hours and 15 minutes. The solvents were removed in vacuo and the residue was stirred with methanol (10 mL) and ethylenediamine (0.4 mL, 0.006 mol) overnight. The solvent was evaporated and the product was purified by preparative-HPLC / MS (C18 column eluting with a gradient of ACN / H2O containing 0.15% NH4OH) to afford the product (25 mg, 14%). 15    1H NMR (300 MHz, d6-dmso): 8 _ 12.08 (s, 1H), 8.68 (s, 2H), 8.39 (s, 1H), 7.59 (d, 1H), 7.05 (d, 1H), 3.32 (s, 2H), 1.73 (s, 6H); MS(ES):267(M+1). Examples 69e and 69f in Table 5b were prepared by a method analogous to that described above for Example 69d, with unsaturated nitriles prepared either according to published literature procedures, or by the method in Step 1. 20 Table 5b Ex. No. Structure Name MS (ES) (M+1) 69e CN N-N / / \ NZ^% NT  h 3-ethyl-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)- 1H-pyrazol-1 -yl]pentanenitrile 295 69f __ / CN N-N / / \ N'^y'A N" H 1-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]-pyrimidin-4-yl)- 1H-pyrazol-1 -yl]cyclopropylacetonitrile 265 Additional analogs were prepared by procedures analogous to those described in Example 69, 25 using different starting materials such as alternative bromide or mesylate compounds for the 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 nucleophilic substitution step. Where the free amine was obtained as the product, the product was purified after deprotection either by silica gel chromatography (eluting with 5% methanol in DCM) or by preparative-HPLC (C18 eluting with a gradient of ACN / H2O containing 0.15% NH4OH). The results are summarized for compounds listed in Table 6. 5 z(Y)n-Z N-N Table 6 Ex. No. Name -(Y)n-Z MS (ES) (M+1) 70 4- 1-[(2R)-pyrrolidin-2-ylmethyl]-1H-pyrazol-4-yl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]-pyrimidine ^NH V 269 71 4-(1-[(2R)-1 -(methylsulfonyl)pyrrolidin-2-yl]methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-72yl)-7H-pyrrolo [2,3-d]pyrimidine ^N v SO2Me 347 73 ethyl 2-methyl-2-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]-pyrimidin-4-yl)- IH-pyrazol-1 -yl]-propanoate trifluoroacetate salt EtO^ O 300 Example 74: (2Z)-3-Cyclopentyl-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]- 10 acrylonitrile Step 1. 3-Cyclopentylprop-2-ynenitrile To a solution of cyclopentylacetylene (0.50 g, 5.3 mmol) in THF (5 mL) at -78 oC was added 2.5 M n-butyllithium in hexane (2.23 mL). The mixture was stirred for 15 min followed by the 15 dropwise addition of phenyl cyanate (0.70 g, 5.8 mmol) in THF (3 mL). The reaction was warmed to 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 room temperature. Into the reaction mixture was poured 6 N NaOH, and the mixture was stirred for 5 minutes. The product was extracted with diethyl ether. The extracts were washed with 6 N NaOH and with brine, then dried over sodium sulfate, decanted and the solvent was removed in vacuo to afford product (600 mg, 95%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCI3): 8 _2.81-2.68 (m, 1H), 2.07-1.54 (m, 8H). 5 Step 2. (2Z)-3-Cyclopentyl-3-[4-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]acrylonitrile To a mixture of 4-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]-pyrimidine (0.40 g, 1.2 mmol) and 3-cyclopentylprop-2-ynenitrile (0.30 g, 2.5 mmol) in DMF (8 mL) 10 was added potassium carbonate (0.09 g, 0.6 mmol). The mixture was stirred for 35 min. The reaction was diluted with ethyl acetate and brine, and the aqueous portion extracted with three volumes of ethyl acetate. The combined organic extracts were washed with brine again, then were dried over sodium sulfate, decanted and concentrated in vacuo. The crude residue was purified by flash column chromatography (ethyl acetate / hexanes) to yield the desired product (290 mg, 53%). 15    1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCb): 8 _8.98 (s, 1H), 8.87 (s, 1H), 8.46 (s, 1H), 7.42 (d, 1H), 6.84 (d, 1H), 5.67 (s, 2H), 5.21 (s, 1H), 3.64-3.55 (m, 1H), 3.53 (t, 2H), 2.13-2.01 (m, 2H), 1.83-1.66 (m, 4H), 1.57-1.46 (m, 2H), 0.91 (t, 2H), -0.07 (s, 9H); MS(ES):435(M+1). Step 3. (2Z)-3-Cyclopentyl-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]acrylonitrile 20           A solution of (2Z)-3-cyclopentyl-3-[4-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]- pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]acrylonitrile (0.030 g, 0.069 mol) in DCM (3 mL) and TFA (2 mL) was stirred for 1 hour. The solvents were removed in vacuo and the product was stirred with THF (1.5 mL), sodium hydroxide, 50% aqueous solution (0.75 mL) and water (0.75 mL) for 2 hours. The reaction mixture was neutralized by the dropwise addition of conc. HCl. The product was extracted 25 with ethyl acetate. The combined organics were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The crude residue was purified by preparative-HPLC / MS (C18 column eluting with a gradient of ACN / H2O containing 0.15% NH4OH) to afford the desired product (16 mg, 76%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, d6-dmso): 8 _9.08 (s, 1H), 8.74 (s, 1H), 8.63 (s, 1H), 7.66 (d, 1H), 7.05 (d, 1H), 5.82 (d, 1H), 3.62-3.54 (m, 1H), 2.00-1.90 (m, 2H), 1.76-1.48 (m, 6H); MS(ES):305(M+1). 30 Example 75 : 3-Cyclopentylidene-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]-propanenitrile 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 N-N Step 1. 3-Cyclopentylidene-3-[4-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]propanenitrile To a suspension of 3-cyclopentylprop-2-ynenitrile (0.4 g, 0.003 mol) in ACN (10 mL) was 5 added 4-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidine (0.53 g, 1.7 mmol) and DBU (0.33 mL, 2.2 mmol). This mixture was stirred at room temperature for 50 minutes. The reaction mixture was partitioned between ethyl acetate and dilute HCl. The aqueous portion was separated and extracted with ethyl acetate. The combined organic extracts were washed with dilute HCl and brine, were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The 10 crude residue was purified by flash column chromatography (ethyl acetate / hexanes) to yield the desired product (540 mg, 74%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCI3): 8 _8.85 (s, 1H), 8.36 (s, 1H), 8.35 (s, 1H), 7.40 (d, 1H), 6.78 (d, 1H), 5.67 (s, 2H), 3.70 (s, 2H), 3.54 (dd, 2H), 2.55 (t, 2H), 2.45 (t, 2h), 1.85 (dddd, 2H), 1.73 (dddd, 2H), 0.91 (dd, 2H), -0.06 (s, 9H); MS(ES):435(M+1). 15 Step 2. 3-Cyclopentylidene-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]propanenitrile A solution of 3-cyclopentylidene-3-[4-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]-pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]propanenitrile (0.030 g, 0.069 mmol) in DCM (3 mL) and TFA (2 mL) was stirred for 1 hour. The solvents were evaporated in vacuo and the product was stirred with 20 sodium hydroxide, 50% aqueous solution (0.75 mL) and water (0.75 mL) and THF (1.5 mL) for 2 hours. The reaction mixture was neutralized by dropwise addition of concentrated HCl. The product was extracted with ethyl acetate. The combined organic extracts were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The crude residue was purified by preparative-HPLC / MS (C18 column eluting with a gradient of ACN / H2O containing 0.15% NH4OH) to afford the desired product 25   (7 mg, 33%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, d6-dmso): 8 _ 12.23-12.01 (br s, 1H), 8.78 (s, 1H), 8.69 (s, 1H), 8.46 (s, 1H), 7.60 (d, 1H), 7.04 (d, 1H), 3.95 (s, 2H), 2.53 (t, 2H), 2.42 (t, 2H), 1.76 (dddd, 2H), 1.65 (dddd, 2H); MS(ES):305(M+1). 30 Example 76: 3-Methyl[5-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-thiazol-2-yl]aminopropane- nitrile trifluoroacetate salt CN *TFA 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 Step 1. 4-(1,3-Thiazol-5-yl)-7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidine 4-Chloro-7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidine (3.00 g, 0.0106 mol), and 1,3-thiazole (7.50 mL, 0.106 mol) were dissolved in N,N-dimethylacetamide (40.0 mL). 5 The solution was distributed in equal portions into four 20 mL microwavable vessels. Into each reaction vessel was then added potassium acetate (0.777 g, 7.93 mmol) followed by tetrakis(triphenyl-phosphine)palladium(O) (0.60 g, 2.1 mmol). Each reaction vessel was heated at 200 °C in the microwave reactor for 30 minutes. The reactions were combined and most of the solvent was removed in vacuo. The residue was diluted with DCM, filtered and concentrated. Purification by flash column 10 chromatography (ethyl acetate / hexanes) afforded the desired product (2.25 g, 64%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCh): 8 8.99 (s, 1H), 8.90 (s, 1H), 8.72 (s, 1H), 7.49 (d, 1H), 6.91 (d, 1H), 5.70 (s, 2H), 3.56 (dd, 2H), 0.93 (dd, 2H), -0.05 (s, 9H); MS(ES):333(M+1). Step 2. 4-(2-Bromo-1,3-thiazol-5-yl)-7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidine 15           2.5 M n-Butyllithium in hexane (0.860 mL) was added dropwise to a -78 °C solution of 4- (1,3-thiazol-5-yl)-7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidine (550 mg, 0.0016 mol) in THF (20 mL). The mixture was stirred for 30 minutes at -78 °C, followed by the slow addition of carbon tetrabromide (658 mg, 0.00198 mol) as a solution in THF (10 mL). After 30 minutes, the mixture was quenched with a small amount of saturated ammonium chloride, diluted with ether, and 20 dried over sodium sulfate. The residue obtained after filtration and concentration was purified by flash column chromatography (ethyl acetate / hexanes) to afford the desired product (387 mg, 57%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3): 8 8.85 (s, 1H), 8.33 (s, 1H), 7.49 (d, 1H), 6.83 (d, 1H), 5.69 (s, 2H), 3.55 (dd, 2H), 0.92 (dd, 2H), -0.05 (s, 9H); MS(ES):411, 413(M+1). 25 Step 3. 4-(2-Bromo-1,3-thiazol-5-yl)-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidine A solution of 4-(2-bromo-1,3-thiazol-5-yl)-7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo-[2,3-d]pyrimidine (370 mg, 0.90 mmol) in DCM (5.0 mL) and TFA (1.0 mL) was stirred at room temperature for 7 hours. The mixture was then concentrated, re-dissolved in methanol (2 mL), and ethylenediamine (0.5 mL) was added. The mixture was stirred for 6 hours at room temperature. The 30 mixture was diluted with DCM (10 mL), and the precipitate was isolated by filtration and washed with a small amount of DCM to afford desired product (182 mg, 72%). 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 1H NMR (300 MHz, d6-dmso): 8 _8.74 (s, 1H), 8.70 (s, 1H), 7.76 (d, 1H), 7.15 (d, 1H); MS(ES):281,283(M+1). Step 4. 3-Methyl[5-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-thiazol-2-yl]aminopropanenitrile 5           A solution of 4-(2-bromo-1,3-thiazol-5-yl)-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidine (31 mg, 0.11 mmol) and 3-(methylamino)propionitrile (103 ^L, 0.00110 mol) in DMF (1.0 mL, 0.013 mol) was stirred at 90 °C for 2 hours. The crude reaction mixture was purified by preparative-HPLC / MS (C18 column eluting with a gradient of ACN / H2O containing 0.15% NH4OH) and again by preparative-HPLC / MS (C18 column eluting with a gradient of ACN / H2O containing 0.1% TFA) to yield the desired product 10 as the trifluoroacetate salt (30 mg, 68%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, d6-DMSO): 8 _ 12.25 (s, 1H), 8.60 (s, 1H), 8.31 (s, 1H), 7.60 (dd, 1H), 7.00 (dd, 1H), 3.89 (t, 2H), 3.20 (s, 3H), 2.94 (t, 2H); MS(ES):285(M+1). Example 77: (3S)- and (3R)-3-[5-(7H-Pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-thiazol-2-yl]hexane-15 nitrile CN                 \   / CN N=(^            N=\ L S           .      k. S x. /            and         y' n^%       n^^y f n^h              n H Step 1. N-Methoxy-N-methylbutanamide To a mixture of butanoic acid (1.01 g, 0.0115 mol) and N,O-dimethylhydroxylamine hydro- 20 chloride (1.12 g, 0.0115 mol) in DCM (50 mL) was added benzotriazol-1-yloxytris(dimethylamino)-phosphonium hexafluorophosphate (5.6 g, 0.013 mol) and TEA (3.2 mL, 0.023 mol). The mixture was stirred overnight at room temperature. The solution was then washed with water and brine, dried over sodium sulfate, and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (ether / hexanes). The solvent was removed (235 mbar / 40 °C) to afford the product 25   (1.33g, 88%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCI3): 8 _3.68 (s, 3H), 3.18 (s, 3H), 2.40 (t, 2H), 1.74-1.59 (m, 2H), 0.96 (t, 3H). Step 2. 1-[5-(7-[2-(Trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-thiazol-2-yl]-butan-1-one 30           2.5 M n-Butyllithium in hexane (878 ^L) was added slowly dropwise to a -78 °C solution of 4-(1,3-thiazol-5-yl)-7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidine (501 mg, 1.37 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 mmol) in THF (20 mL). After 45 minutes, N-methoxy-N-methylbutanamide (0.360 g, 2.74 mmol) was added. The reaction was continued at -78 °C for 30 min, and was then allowed to reach room temperature. The reaction was quenched with saturated ammonium chloride, and was extracted with ethyl acetate. The extracts were washed with water and brine, dried over sodium sulfate and 5 concentrated in vacuo. Flash column chromatography (ethyl acetate / hexanes) afforded the product (235 mg, 42%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCb): 8 _8.93 (s, 1H), 8.76 (s, 1H), 7.52 (d, 1H), 6.92 (d, 1H), 5.71 (s, 2H), 3.56 (dd, 2H), 3.19 (t, 2H), 1.92-1.77 (m, 2H), 1.05 (t, 3H), 0.93 (dd, 2H), -0.05 (s, 9H); MS(ES):403(M+1). 10 Step 3. (2E)- and (2Z)-3-[5-(7-[2-(Trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-thiazol-2-yl]hex-2-enenitrile To a solution of 1.0 M potassium tert-butoxide in THF (0.605 mL) in THF (4.0 mL) at 0° C was added diethyl cyanomethylphosphonate (0.102 mL, 0.634 mmol) dropwise. The cooling bath 15 was removed and the reaction was warmed to room temperature. After 30 minutes, a solution of 1-[5-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-thiazol-2-yl]butan-1-one (232 mg, 0.576 mmol) in THF (3.0 mL) was added dropwise. The reaction was stirred for 2 hours, and the crude mixture was then adsorbed onto silica gel and purified by flash column chromatography (ethyl acetate / hexanes) to afford the product as a mixture of olefin isomers (225 mg, 92%). 20   1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCI3), major isomer: 8_ 8.89 (s, 1H), 8.65 (s, 1H), 7.52 (d, 1H), 6.89 (d, 1H), 6.35 (s, 1H), 5.70 (s, 2H), 3.56 (dd, 2H), 2.96 (t, 2H), 1.88-1.72 (m, 2H), 1.08 (t, 3H), 0.93 (dd, 2H), -0.07 (s, 9H); MS(ES):426(M+1). Step 4. (3S)- and (3R)-3-[5-(7-[2-(Trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-25 1,3-thiazol-2-yl]hexanenitrile Cupric acetate, monohydrate (0.7 mg, 0.004 mmol) and (oxydi-2,1-phenylene)bis(diphenyl-phosphine) (2 mg, 0.004 mol) was mixed in toluene (0.24 mL). PMHS (30 pL) was added. The mixture was stirred for 25 minutes at room temperature followed by the addition of (2E)-3-[5-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-thiazol-2-yl]hex-2-enenitrile (51 30 mg, 0.12 mol) in toluene (0.24 mL) and finally, tert-butyl alcohol (0.043 mL). The resulting mixture was stirred overnight. The crude mixture was purified directly by flash column chromatography (ethyl acetate / hexanes) to afford the desired product (39 mg, 76%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCb): 8 _8.87 (s, 1H), 8.52 (s, 1H), 7.48 (d, 1H), 6.87 (d, 1H), 5.69 (s, 2H), 3.60-3.46 (m, 3H), 2.99-2.82 (m, 2H), 2.05-1.89 (m, 2H), 1.50-1.34 (m, 2H), 0.97 (t, 3H), 0.92 (t, 35   2H), -0.06 (s, 9H); MS(ES):428(M+1). Step 5. (3S)- and (3R)-3-[5-(7H-Pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-thiazol-2-yl]hexanenitrile TFA (1.0 mL) was added to a solution of 3-[5-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-thiazol-2-yl]hexanenitrile (36 mg, 0.084 mmol) in DCM (4.0 mL) and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours. The mixture was concentrated, and redissolved in methanol (3 mL), to which ethylenediamine (0.1 mL) was added. After 2 hours reaction time, the mixture was concentrated and directly purified by preparative-HPLC / MS (C18 column eluting with a gradient of ACN / H2O containing 0.15% NH4OH) to afford the desired product (10 mg, 40%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCI3): 8 _9.96 (br s, 1H), 8.87 (s, 1H), 8.54 (s, 1H), 7.51-7.45 (m, 1H), 6.90-6.86 (m, 1H), 3.59-3.44 (m, 1H), 3.01-2.82 (m, 2H), 2.06-1.87 (m, 2H), 1.51-1.34 (m, 2H), 0.98 (t, 3H); MS(ES):298(M+1). Example 78: (3R)- and (3S)-3-Cyclopentyl-3-[5-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-thiazol-2-yl]propanenitrile CN                  (” CN N=\                   N=\ S       and      ^KS N'zy''\          n 1¼ NT  H                  N H To a solution of (2E)- and (2Z)-3-cyclopentyl-3-[5-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-thiazol-2-yl]acrylonitrile (199 mg, 0.440 mmol) (prepared, for example, as in Example 77, steps 1 through 3) in a mixture of ethanol (10 mL) and ethyl acetate (10 mL) was added a catalytic amount of 10% palladium on carbon. The mixture was stirred at room temperature under one atmosphere of hydrogen overnight. It was then subjected to 50 PSI H2 until the reaction was complete. Filtration and removal of solvent afforded an oil which was dissolved in DCM (4 mL) and TFA (1 mL). The solution was stirred until starting material was consumed and the mixture was then concentrated and re-dissolved in methanol (3 mL), to which ethylenediamine (0.4 mL) was added. The solution was stirred at room temperature for one hour, and was concentrated in vacuo. The crude mixture was purified by preparative-HPLC / MS (C18 column eluting with a gradient of ACN / H2O containing 0.15% NH4OH) to afford the desired product (36 mg, 25%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3): 8 _ 10.44 (br s, 1H), 8.89 (s, 1H), 8.56 (s, 1H), 7.50 (dd, 1H), 6.89 (dd, 1H), 3.34 (dt, 1H), 2.98 (dd, 1H), 2.89 (dd, 1H), 2.44-2.31 (m, 1H), 2.07-1.96 (m, 1H), 1.80-1.52 (m, 5H), 1.40-1.24 (m, 2H); MS(ES):324(M+1). 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 The following compounds of Table 5c were prepared (as racemic mixtures) as described by Example 77, 78 or 86, as indicated in the following table, by using different Weinreb amides (as prepared in Example 77, Step 1): Table 5c Ex. No. Name R MS (ES) (M+1) Method of preparation 79 5-methyl-3-[5-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]-pyrimidin-4-yl)- 1,3-thiazol-2-yl]-hexanenitrile 312 Ex. 77 80 3 -pyridin-3-yl-3-[5-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]-pyrimidin-4-yl)- 1,3-thiazol-2-yl]-propanenitrile ^J^N 333 Ex. 78 81 3-(5-bromopyridin-3-yl)-3-[5-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-thiazol-2-yl]propanenitrile Br N 411,413 Ex. 77 82 5-2-cyano-1-[5-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]-pyrimidin-4-yl)- 1,3-thiazol-2-yl]-ethylnicotinonitrile CN N 358 Ex. 77 through Step 4, then Ex. 431 excluding purification, then Ex. 77, Step 5 83 3 -[5-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)- 1,3-thiazol-2-yl]butanenitrile Me 270 Ex. 86, Step 3 subjected to conditions of Ex. 77, Steps 4&5 83A 3 -pyridin-4-yl-3-[5-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)- 1,3-thiazol-2-yl]propanenitrile AN 333 Ex. 78 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 83B 4-2-cyano-1-[5-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]-pyrimidin-4-yl)- 1,3-thiazol-2-yl]-ethylpyridine-2-carbonitrile trifluoroacetate salt N CN 358 Ex. 77 through Step 3, then Ex. 431 excluding purification, then Ex. 78, purified by prep- HPLC / MS using H2O / ACN containing 0.1% TFA 83C 3 -pyridin-2-yl-3-[5-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]-pyrimidin-4-yl)- 1,3-thiazol-2-yl]-propanenitrile N 333 Ex. 78 Example 84: (2S)- and (2R)-2-[5-(7H-Pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-thiazol-2-yl]pentane-nitrile CN                >-CN N=\                     N \ S       and      ^AS n^VA       n^VA 11 hl"  H 5 Step 1. (2S)- and (2R)-2-[5-(7-[2-(Trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-thiazol-2-yl]pentanenitrile To a mixture of 1-[5-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-thiazol-2-yl]butan-1-one (prepared as in Example 77) (101 mg, 0.251 mmol) and p-tolylsulfonyl- 10 methyl isocyanide (147 mg, 0.753 mmol) in a mixture of DMSO (5.0 mL) and ethanol (61 pL) was added 1.0 M potassium tert-butoxide in THF (753 ^L). The mixture was then heated to 45 °C for 2 hours. Upon cooling to room temperature, the mixture was quenched by the addition of saturated ammonium chloride, followed by water. The product was extracted with ether, and the extracts were washed with water and brine, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. Flash 15 column chromatography (ethyl acetate / hexanes) afforded the product (39 mg, 25%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCh): 8 8.88 (s, 1H), 8.52 (s, 1H), 7.50 (d, 1H), 6.87 (d, 1H), 5.70 (s, 2H), 4.32 (dd, 1H), 3.55 (dd, 2H), 2.20-2.11 (m, 2H), 1.71-1.57 (m, 2H), 1.03 (t, 3H), 0.93 (dd, 2H); MS(ES):414(M+1). 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 Step 2. (2S)- and (2R)-2-[5-(7H-Pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-thiazol-2-yl]pentanenitrile A solution of 2-[5-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-thiazol-2-yl]pentanenitrile (59 mg, 0.093 mmol) in DCM (3 mL) and TFA (0.5 mL) was stirred at room temperature for 4 hours. The mixture was then concentrated, and the residue was then dissolved 5 in methanol (3 mL) to which ethylenediamine (0.3 mL) was then added. The solution was stirred at room temperature for 40 minutes. The solvent was removed in vacuo, and the crude mixture was purified by preparative-HPLC / MS (C18 column eluting with a gradient of ACN / H2O containing 0.15% NH4OH) to afford the desired product (20 mg, 76%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3): 8 _9.66 (br s, 1H), 8.88 (s, 1H), 8.54 (s, 1H), 7.49 (dd, 1H), 6.88 (dd, 10    1H), 4.33 (dd, 1H), 2.23-2.12 (m, 2H), 1.75-1.60 (m, 2H), 1.04 (t, 3H); MS(ES):284(M+1). Example 85: (4S)- and (4R)-4-[5-(7H-Pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-thiazol-2-yl]heptane-nitrile 15 To a solution of triethyl phosphonoacetate (188 mg, 0.838 mmol) in THF (6.0 mL) at 0 °C was added 1.0 M potassium tert-butoxide in THF (840 p,L). The mixture was then allowed to warm to room temperature followed by re-cooling to 0 °C, at which time 1-[5-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]-methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-thiazol-2-yl]butan-1-one (prepared as in Example 77) (225 mg, 0.559 mmol) in THF (4.0 mL) was added. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 20    1.5 hours, at which time it was quenched with water and extracted with ethyl acetate. The combined extracts were washed with water and brine, dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated in vacuo. Flash column chromatography afforded the product as a mixture of olefin isomers (222 mg, 84%). MS(ES):473(M+1). Ethyl 3-[5-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-thiazol-25 2-yl]hex-2-enoate as a mixture of (2E)- and (2Z)- isomers (222 mg, 0.470 mmol) was dissolved in ethanol (10 mL), and a catalytic amount of 10% Pd-C was added. The mixture was stirred under an atmosphere of hydrogen, provided by a balloon, for 16 hours. Filtration and concentration in vacuo afforded the desired product (201 mg, 90%). MS(ES):475(M+1). To a solution of ethyl 3-[5-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-30 4-yl)-1,3-thiazol-2-yl]hexanoate (201 mg, 0.423 mmol) in THF (5.0 mL) at -78 °C was added 1.00 M diisobutylaluminum hydride in DCM (1.06 mL). The mixture was allowed to warm to -10 °C slowly 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 over 1.5 hours, followed by the addition of potassium sodium tartrate tetrahydrate, water, and ether. The mixture was stirred for 1 hour, then layers were separated, and the aqueous layer was extracted further with ethyl acetate. The organic extracts were washed with water and brine, dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated in vacuo to afford desired product (176 mg, 96%). MS(ES):433(M+1). 5           A solution of 3-[5-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3- thiazol-2-yl]hexan-1-ol (88 mg, 0.20 mmol) in TFA (2 mL) was stirred for 30 minutes. The TFA was then evaporated and the residue was stirred in methanol (2 mL) containing ethylenediamine (0.2 mL) and a drop of water for 30 minutes. Purification via preparative-HPLC / MS (C18 eluting with a gradient of ACN / H2O containing 0.15% NH4OH) afforded the desired product (36 mg, 58%). 10   MS(ES):303(M+1). To a mixture of 3-[5-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-thiazol-2-yl]hexan-1-ol (36 mg, 0.12 mmol) and TEA (19.9 pL, 0.143 mmol) in DCM (5 mL) at 0 °C was added methanesulfonyl chloride (11.0 p,L, 0.143 mmol). After stirring for 10 minutes, the solution was concentrated and dissolved in DMSO (1.6 mL) and sodium cyanide (23 mg, 0.48 mmol) was added. The mixture was 15 then heated at 125 °C in the microwave for 30 minutes. The mixture was then purified directly using preparative-HPLC / MS (C18 eluting with a gradient of ACN / H2O containing 0.15% NH4OH) to afford the desired product (10 mg, 27%). 1HNMR (400 MHz, CDCb): 8 _9.37 (br s, 1H), 8.86 (s, 1H), 8.52 (s, 1H), 7.46 (dd, 1H), 6.88 (dd, 1H), 3.34-3.25 (m, 1H), 2.47-2.30 (m, 2H), 2.22-2.12 (m, 2H), 1.95-1.71 (m, 2H), 1.44-1.31 (m, 2H), 20   0.94 (t, 3H); MS(ES):312(M+1). Example 86: 3-[5-(7H-Pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-thiazol-2-yl]pentanedinitrile Step 1. N-Methoxy-2-[(4-methoxybenzyl)oxy]-N-methylacetamide 25           To a mixture of [(4-methoxybenzyl)oxy]acetic acid (Bioorganic and Medicinal Chemistry Letters, 2001, pp. 2837-2841) (6.86 g, 0.0350 mol) and N,O-dimethylhydroxylamine hydrochloride (3.41 g, 0.0350 mol) in DCM (100 mL) was added benzotriazol-1-yloxytris(dimethylamino)-phosphonium hexafluorophosphate (17 g, 0.038 mol) followed by TEA (9.7 mL, 0.070 mol). The resulting mixture was stirred overnight at room temperature. The solution was then washed with 30 water, 0.5 M HCl, saturated NaHCO3, and brine, then was dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 concentrated in vacuo. Flash column chromatography (ether / hexanes) afforded the desired product (5.75 g, 69%). Step 2. 2-[(4-Methoxybenzyl)oxy]-1-[5-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]- 5 pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-thiazol-2-yl]ethanone To a solution of 4-(1,3-thiazol-5-yl)-7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]-pyrimidine (2.12 g, 6.38 mmol) in THF (70 mL) at -78 °C was added 2.5 M n-butyllithium in hexane (3.06 mL) slowly dropwise. After stirring for 30 minutes, N-methoxy-2-[(4-methoxybenzyl)oxy]-N-methylacetamide (2.29 g, 9.56 mmol) was added. The reaction was continued for 30 minutes 10 following the addition, at -78 °C, then the cooling bath was removed and the reaction was quenched with saturated ammonium chloride and extracted with ether. The extracts were dried with sodium sulfate and concentrated in vacuo. The crude mixture was purified by flash column chromatography (ethyl acetate / hexanes) to afford desired product (2.16 g, 66%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCI3): 8 _8.93 (s, 1H), 8.72 (s, 1H), 7.53 (d, 1H), 7.37 (d, 2H), 6.91 (d, 2H), 15    6.89 (d, 1H), 5.70 (s, 2H), 5.00 (s, 2H), 4.70 (s, 2H), 3.81 (s, 3H), 3.56 (dd, 2h), 0.93 (dd, 2H), -0.05 (s, 9H); MS(ES):511(M+1). Step 3. (2E)- and (2Z)-4-[(4-Methoxybenzyl)oxy]-3-[5-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-thiazol-2-yl]but-2-enenitrile 20          To a solution of 1 M potassium tert-butoxide in THF (4.44 mL) in THF (30 mL) at 0° C was added diethyl cyanomethylphosphonate (820 mg, 0.0046 mol) dropwise. The bath was removed and the reaction was warmed to room temperature. After 30 minutes, a solution of 2-[(4-methoxybenzyl)-oxy]-1-[5-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-thiazol-2-yl]-ethanone (2.16 g, 0.00423 mol) in THF (20 mL) was added dropwise. The reaction was stirred for 1 25 hour, and was then quenched with a small amount of saturated ammonium chloride, diluted with ether, dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated in vacuo. Purification by flash column chromatography, eluting with a gradient of 0-35% ethyl acetate / hexanes afforded the desired product as a mixture of olefin isomers in nearly equal amounts (1.76 g, 78%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): 8 8.90 (s, 1H), 8.88 (s, 1H), 8.71 (s, 1H), 8.67 (s, 1H), 7.50 (d, 2H), 7.35 30 (dd, 2H), 7.31 (dd, 2H), 6.92 (dd, 2H), 6.90 (dd, 2H), 6.86 (d, 2H), 6.62 (s, 1H), 6.10 (t, 1H), 5.70 (s, 4H), 4.75 (s, 2H), 4.72 (d, 2H), 4.64 (s, 4H), 3.82 (s, 3H), 3.81 (s, 3H), 3.56 (dd, 2H), 3.55 (dd, 2H), 0.96-0.90 (m, 4H), -0.05 (s, 9H), -0.054 (s, 9H); MS(ES):534(M+1). Step 4. 4-[(4-Methoxybenzyl)oxy]-3-[5-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]- 35 pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-thiazol-2-yl]butanenitrile 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 (2E)- and   (2Z)-4-[(4-Methoxybenzyl)oxy]-3-[5-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H- pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-thiazol-2-yl]but-2-enenitrile (880 mg, 1.6 mmol) was dissolved in a mixture of ethanol (20 mL) and ethyl acetate (20 mL). A catalytic amount of 10% Pd-C was added. The mixture was shaken under 50 PSI of hydrogen. The mixture was filtered and concentrated in 5 vacuo to afford the desired product (0.85 g, 99%). MS(ES):536(M+1). Step 5. 3-[5-(7H-Pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-thiazol-2-yl]pentanedinitrile 4-[(4-Methoxybenzyl)oxy]-3-[5-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]-pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-thiazol-2-yl]butanenitrile (251 mg, 0.468 mmol) in DCM (10 mL) was treated 10 with dichlorodicyanoquinone (DDQ) (434 mg, 1.87 mmol), followed by water (376 pL). After 1.5 hours, saturated sodium bicarbonate and water were added, and the reaction was extracted with ethyl acetate three times. The extracts were washed with water, brine, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford the crude product which was used without further purification. A solution of the above prepared 4-hydroxy-3-[5-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-15 pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-thiazol-2-yl]butanenitrile in DCM (12 mL) at 0 °C was treated sequentially with TEA (130 ^L, 0.94 mmol) and methanesulfonyl chloride (73 p,L, 0.94 mmol). After 1 hour reaction time, the mixture was diluted with water and extracted with ethyl acetate three times. The extracts were washed with water and brine, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was then dissolved in DMSO (5 mL) and sodium cyanide (110 mg, 2.3 mmol) was 20 added. After 30 minutes, the mixture was diluted with water, extracted with ether, washed with water, brine and dried over sodium sulfate. Concentration and purification by flash column chromatography (ethyl acetate / hexanes) afforded the desired product (14 mg, 7%). MS(ES):425(M+1). A solution of 3-[5-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-thiazol-2-yl]pentanedinitrile (14 mg, 0.033 mmol) in DCM (3 mL) containing TFA (0.6 mL) was 25 stirred for 4 hours. The mixture was then concentrated and the residue was redissolved in methanol (2 mL) to which ethylenediamine (0.4 mL) was then added. After 1 hour reaction time, the product was purified by preparative-HPLC / MS (C18 eluting with a gradient of ACN / H2O containing 0.15% NH4OH) to afford the desired product (6 mg, 62%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, d6-dmso): 8 _ 12.27 (br s, 1H), 8.84 (s, 1H), 8.76 (s, 1H), 7.75 (d, 1H), 7.14 (d, 30    1H), 4.14 (m, 1H), 3.17 (d, 4H); MS(ES):295(M+1). Example 87: (3R)-3-Cyclopentyl-3-[5-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-oxazol-2-yl]-propanenitrile, and 35   (3S)-3-Cyclopentyl-3-[5-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-oxazol-2-yl]propanenitrile 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 and Step 1. 4-(1,3-Oxazol-5-yl)-7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidine A mixture of  4-chloro-7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidine 5   (0.440 g, 1.55 mmol), 1,3-oxazole (0.306 mL, 4.65 mmol), potassium acetate (0.456 g, 4.65 mmol) and tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) (0.179 g, 0.155 mmol) in N,N-dimethylacetamide (8.0 mL) was heated to 200 °C in the microwave reactor for 30 minutes. Most of the solvent was removed in vacuo. The resulting residue was diluted with DCM, and was filtered and concentrated. Flash column chromatography (ethyl acetate / hexanes) afforded the product (330 mg, 67%). 10    1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3): 8 8.96 (s, 1H), 8.21 (s, 1H), 8.08 (s, 1H), 7.54 (d, 1H), 7.08 (d, 1H), 5.76 (s, 2H), 3.60 (t, 2H), 0.98 (t, 2H), 0.00 (s, 9H); MS(ES):317(M+1). Step 2. Cyclopentyl[5-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-oxazol-2-yl]methanone 15           n-Butyllithium in hexane (1.6 M, 0.30 mL) was added slowly dropwise to a -78 °C solution of 4-(1,3-oxazol-5-yl)-7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidine (140.0 mg, 0.44 mmol) in THF (10.0 mL). After 20 minutes, 1.0 M zinc dichloride in ether (0.53 mL) was added. The reaction mixture was then stirred for 60 min at 0 °C. Following this, copper(I) iodide (84 mg, 0.44 mmol) was added, and this mixture was allowed to stir for 10 minutes. Cyclopentanecarbonyl chloride 20    (108 p.L, 0.885 mmol) was then added. The reaction was stirred at 0 °C for a further 1 hour, at which time it was allowed to warm to room temperature. The reaction was quenched by the addition of saturated NH4Cl solution, and was extracted with ethyl acetate. The extracts were washed with water and brine, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. Flash column chromatography (ethyl acetate / hexanes) afforded the product (97 mg, 53%). 25    1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): 8 8.96 (s, 1H), 8.21 (s, 1H), 7.56 (d, 1H), 7.22 (d, 1H), 5.76 (s, 2H), 3.60 (t, 2H), 3.56 (t, 1H), 2.23-1.56 (m, 8H), 0.98 (t, 2H), 0.00 (s, 9H); MS(ES):413(M+1). Step 3. (3R)- and (3S)-3-Cyclopentyl-3-[5-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-oxazol-2-yl]propanenitrile To a solution of 1.0 M potassium tert-butoxide in THF (0.355 mL) and THF (3 mL) at 0° C 30 was added diethyl cyanomethylphosphonate (66 mg, 0.37 mmol) dropwise. The cold bath was 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 removed and the reaction was warmed to room temperature. After 30 minutes, a solution of cyclopentyl[5-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-oxazol-2-yl]methanone (1.40E2 mg, 0.338 mmol) in THF (2.0 mL) was added dropwise. After 3 hours reaction time, the mixture was adsorbed onto silica gel, and flash column chromatography (ethyl 5 acetate / hexanes) afforded the desired product as a mixture of olefin isomers (89 mg, 60%). MS(ES):436(M+1). To a mixture of cupric acetate, monohydrate (4.0 mg, 0.020 mmol) and (oxydi-2,1-phenylene)bis(diphenylphosphine) (11 mg, 0.020 mmol) in toluene (0.40 mL, 0.0038 mol) was added PMHS (50 ^L). The resulting mixture was stirred for 25 minutes at room temperature, followed by 10 the addition of (2E)- and (2Z)-3-cyclopentyl-3-[5-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo-[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-oxazol-2-yl]acrylonitrile (88 mg, 0.20 mmol) in toluene (0.40 mL), and then tert-butyl alcohol (0.072 mL). After failure to react at room temperature over 16 hours, additional cupric acetate, monohydrate and (oxydi-2,1-phenylene)bis(diphenylphosphine) (0.10 mol equivalent each) were added and the reaction mixture was heated at 60 °C for 16 hours. The crude 15 mixture was subjected to flash column chromatography (ethyl acetate / hexanes) to afford the desired product (21 mg, 23%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCh): 8 8.96 (s, 1H), 8.02 (s, 1H), 7.56 (d, 1H), 7.10 (d, 1H), 5.76 (s, 2H), 3.60 (t, 2H), 3.38-3.30 (m, 1H), 3.03 (dd, 1H), 2.95 (dd, 1H), 2.60-2.40 (m, 1H), 2.10-2.00 (m, 1H), 1.85-1.15 (m, 7H), 0.98 (t, 2H), 0.00 (s, 9H); MS(ES):438(M+1). 20 Step 4. (3R)- and (3S)-3-Cyclopentyl-3-[5-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-oxazol-2-yl]-propanenitrile A solution of 3-cyclopentyl-3-[5-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]-pyrimidin-4-yl)-1,3-oxazol-2-yl]propanenitrile (20.0 mg, 0.0457 mmol) was stirred with TFA (0.1 25 mL) in DCM (0.2 mL) for 6 hours. The solvent was removed, and the resulting residue was stirred overnight with ethylenediamine (0.1 mL) in methanol (0.2 mL). The solvent was removed in vacuo. The desired product was obtained via preparative-HPLC / MS (C18 column eluting with a gradient of ACN / H2O containing 0.15% NH4OH) (5.3 mg, 38%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): 8 10.25 (br s, 1H), 8.90 (s, 1H), 8.00 (s, 1H), 7.50 (d, 1H), 7.06 (d, 1H), 30    3.36-3.28 (m, 1H), 2.98 (dd, 1H), 2.90 (dd, 1H), 2.51-2.38 (m, 1H), 2.08-1.96 (m, 1H), 1.80-1.51 (m, 5H), 1.44-1.30 (m, 2H); MS(ES):308(M+1). The following compound of Table 5d was also prepared as a racemic mixture, according to the procedure of the above Example 87. 35                                          Table 5d Ex. No. Structure Name R MS (ES) (M+1) 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 Example 90: 5-(Methylthio)-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]pentane-nitrile 5 Step 1. (2E)-5-(Methylthio)pent-2-enenitrile To a 0 °C mixture of [chloro(triphenyl)phosphoranyl]ACN (2.5 g, 0.0073 mol) in THF (10 mL, 0.1 mol) was added TEA (2.0 mL, 0.014 mol), and the resulting mixture was stirred for 30 min. The ice bath was removed for 30 min, then the mixture was re-cooled back to 0 °C, A solution of 3 10 (methylthio)-propanol (0.68 mL, 0.0072 mol) in THF (1 mL, 0.02 mol) was added and the mixture was stirred overnight. Water was added and the mixture was filtered. The filtrate was washed with water x3 and brine. The organic phase was dried and the solvent was removed by rotary evaporation to give 2.1 g of an off-white solid. The solid was triturated with MTBE and was filtered. The filtrate was washed with 1N HCl, water, sat. NaHCO3 and brine. The organic phase was dried and was 15 concentrated using a rotary evaporator to give 0.62 g orange oil (44% yield, trans : cis ~ 2 : 1). 1H NMR for trans (400 MHz, CDCI3): 8 6.68 (1H, m); 5.14 (1H, d); 2.6 (2H, m); 2.55 (2H, t); 2.1 (3H, s). Step 2. 5-(Methylthio)-3-[4-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-20 pyrazol-1-yl]pentanenitrile A mixture of 4-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]-pyrimidine (0.30 g, 0.00095 mol), (2E)-5-(methylthio)pent-2-enenitrile (0.28 g, 0.0016 mol) and DBU (45 ^L, 0.00030 mol) in ACN (3 mL, 0.06 mol) was stirred at rt for 5 days. The solvent was removed 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 by rotary evaporation to give an orange oil. The crude oil was chromatographed with 30-70 ethyl acetate / hex, to give 0.35 g of a colorless oil (83% yield). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3): 8 8.95 (1H, s); 8.41 (1H, s); 8.4 (1H, s); 7.48 (1H, d); 6.84 (1H, d); 5.75 (2H, s); 4.95 (1H, br); 3.6 (2H, t); 3.1 (2H, m); 2.58 (2H, m); 2.28 (2H, m); 2.1 (3H, s); 1.99 (2H, t); 5   0.0 (9H, s). MS (M+H): 443. Step 3. 5-(Methylthio)-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]pentanenitrile A solution of 5-(methylthio)-3-[4-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]-pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]pentanenitrile (0.35 g, 0.00079 mol) in THF (4 mL, 0.05 mol) and 10   3.0 M HCl (HCl) in water (4 mL) was heated to reflux overnight. The solvent was removed by rotary evaporation to give a pale orange oil. The oil was stirred in ethanol (3 mL, 0.05 mol) and 8.0 M ammonium hydroxide in water (1 mL) overnight. The reaction was concentrated and purified by prep LCMS (C18 column eluting with a gradient of ACN / H2O containing 0.15% NH4OH) to give 125 mg of a white foam. The white foam was triturated with MTBE (~ 1.5 mL). The resulting solid was 15 filtered, washed and dried to give 80 mg of the product (32% yield). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): 8 10.38 (1H, s); 8.88 (1H, s); 8.39 (1H, s); 8.38 (1H, s); 7.44 (1H, d); 6.8 (1H, d); 5.75 (2H, s); 4.9 (1H, br); 3.05 (2H, m); 2.5 (2H, m); 2.23 (2H, d); 2.1 (3H, s). MS (M+H): 313. 20 Example 91: 5-(Methylsulfinyl)-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]-pentanenitrile / CN    ZCH3 / — /  'O N-N / / \ N N   H A solution of  5-(methylthio)-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]- pentanenitrile (0.065 g, 0.00021 mol) and hydrogen peroxide (0.022 mL, 0.00023 mol) in ACN (1 25 mL, 0.02 mol) was stirred overnight. The reaction was concentrated and purified by HPLC to give 21 mg of a solid. The solid was triturated with MTBE (1 mL) / DCM (10 drops). The solid was filtered and washed to give 13 mg of a white solid (20% yield) which was dried rt to 50 °C for 2 h. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): 8 9.95 (1H, s); 8.85 (1H, s); 8.4 (2H, m); 7.4 (1H, d); 6.8 (1H, s); 4.9 (1H, br); 3.15 (2H, m); 3.0 (2H, m); 2.8-2.5 (2H, m); 2.6 (3H, s). MS (M+H): 329. 30 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 Example 92: 5-(Methylsulfonyl)-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]-pentanenitrile A solution of  5-(methylthio)-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]- 5 pentanenitrile (0.040 g, 0.00013 mol) and hydrogen peroxide (0.5 mL, 0.005 mol) in ACN (1 mL, 0.02 mol) was refluxed overnight. The reaction was purified by HPLC to give 16 mg of a white glass / solid which was triturated with EtOH (~0.8 mL) to give 13 mg of a white solid (30% yield). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3): 8 8.75 (1H, s); 8.48 (1H, d); 8.4 (1H, d); 7.43 (1H, d); 6.8 (1H, s); 5.0 (1H, br); 3.4 (2H, m); 3.2-3.0 (2H, m); 2.8-2.5 (2H, m); 2.95 (3H, s). MS (M+H): 345. 10 Example 93: 4,4,4-Trifluoro-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-pyrazol-1-yl]-butyronitrile r- CN F3C~\ N-N / A NZ^% n" h Step 1. 4,4,4-Trifluoro-3-[4-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]butanenitrile 15           A mixture of 4-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]- pyrimidine (6.9 g, 0.022 mol), (2E)-4,4,4-trifluorobut-2-enenitrile (2.8 g, 0.023 mol) and DBU (0.18 mL, 0.0012 mol) in ACN (70 mL, 1 mol) was stirred for 20 min. The reaction was filtered and filtrate was removed by rotary evaporation to give an orange oil. The crude oil was chromatographed with 20-50% ethyl acetate / hex to give to give 9.1 g of a solid / oil (96% yield). A single enantiomer (peak 2) 20 was separated by chiral column chromatography (OD-H column, 30%EtOH / hex) as a greenish solid / glass (3.3 g, 32% yield). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): 8 8.93 (1H, s); 8.46 (1H, s); 8.45 (1H, s); 7.5 (1H, d); 6.85 (1H, d); 5.75 (2H, s); 5.2 (1H, m); 3.6 (2H, t); 3.7-3.3 (2H, m); 1.99 (2H, t); 0.0 (9H, s). MS (M+H): 438. 25 Step 2. 4,4,4-Trifluoro-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-pyrazol-1-yl]-butyronitrile 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 A solution of 4,4,4-trifluoro-3-[4-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]-pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]butanenitrile (3.1 g, 0.0071 mol) from Step 1 in THF (35 mL, 0.43 mol) and 3.0 M HCl in water (35 mL) was heated to reflux overnight. The solvent was removed by rotary evaporation to give a greenish orange oil / glass. The oil was stirred with ethyl acetate and sat. 5   NaHCO3 (50 mL). The aqueous phase was extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic layers were washed with brine and reduced by rotary evaporation to give an oil / glass residue. The residue was stirred in ethanol (20 mL, 0.3 mol) and 8.0 M ammonium hydroxide in water (10 mL) over a weekend. The solvent was removed by rotary evaporation to give a pale orange foam / solid. The crude was chromatographed with 0-7% MeOH / DCM, 0-0.7% NH4OH to give 3 g of a pale orange 10 paste / solid. The solid was recrystallized from EtOH to give 1.6 g of an off-white crystals (74% yield). 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO): 8 12.2 (1H, s); 8.95 (1H, s); 8.7 (1H, s); 8.5 (1H, s); 7.63 (1H, d); 6.96 (1H, d); 6.01 (1H, m); 3.7 (2H, m). MS (M+H): 306. The following compounds of Table 5e were prepared as indicated in the column labeled 15 “Prep. Ex. No.” Table 5e Ex. No. Structure Name MS (M+H) Prep. Ex. No. 94 CN N-N / n'-^V'A II 1 7 'N ^ N N   H 5,5-Dimethyl-3-[4-(7H- pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-pyrazol-1 -yl]-hexanenitrile 308 61 modification G 95 O / / -- S / / \ O ---\ N-N / A n'A^ n" h 4-[1 -(2-Methanesulfonyl-ethyl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidine 291 61 modification G 96 z o               \__ / \   Z^\   / / 1    1   / —\ o co LL 5,5,5-Trifluoro-4-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-pyrazol-1 -yl]-pentanenitrile 320 59 modification G 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 Example 97: 3-(2-Cyano-1-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]ethyl)-cyclo-pentane-carbonitrile trifluoroacetate CN CN N-N / / A TFA n"^ 11N   H 5 Step 1: 3-(Dimethoxymethyl)cyclopentanecarbaldehyde. Into a 3-neck round bottom flask 2-norbornene (5.500 g, 0.05841 mol) was dissolved in DCM (198.0 mL,) and methanol (38.5 mL) and was cooled at -78 °C. Ozone was passed through the reaction until it turned blue and was stirred at -78 °C for 30 minutes. Then nitrogen was passed through for 20 minutes and p-toluenesulfonic acid (0.95 g, 0.0055 mol) was added The reaction was 10 allowed to warm at 20 °C and was stirred for 90 minutes. Into the reaction was added sodium bicarbonate (1.67 g, 0.0199 mol) and the resulting mixture was stirred at 20 °C for 30 minutes and dimethyl sulfide (9.4 mL, 0.13 mol) was added. The reaction was stirred for 16 hours and was reduced by rotary evaporation to ~50 mL The reaction was extracted with DCM and the organic extracts were washed with water and brine, dried (MgSO4), and stripped in vacuo. The reaction was 15 distilled at 135 °C (bath temperature) at high pump vacuum to give the product (7.5 g) as a ~2:1 mixture of diastereomers. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3): 9.64 & 9.62 (d, 1H), 4.15 & 4.12 (s, 1H), 3.35 & 3.34 (s, 6H), 2.77 m, 1H), 2.34 (m, 1H), 1.35-2.00 (m, 6H). Step 2. (2E,Z)-3-[3-(Dimethoxymethyl)cyclopentyl]acrylonitrile. 20           Into a flask containing a 0 °C solution of t-BuOK in THF (1.0 M, 6,10 mL) was added a solution of diethyl cyanomethylphosphonate (1.1 g, 6.4 mmol) in THF (8 mL). The cooling bath was removed and the reaction was warmed to ambient temperature, then a solution of 3-(dimethoxy-methyl)cyclopentanecarbaldehyde (1.00 g, 5.81 mmol) in THF (2 mL) was added dropwise. Shortly 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 after completion of the addition orange gel-like particulates began to form, after approximately 1 hour the reaction was gelatinous. The reaction was held with stirring at ambient temperature for 16 hours at which time tlc indicated complete reaction. The reaction was partitioned between water and EtOAc and the aqueous phase was washed with additional EtOAc. The combined organic phase was washed 5 with water, then sat'd NaCl, and then was dried over MgSO4 and reduced in vacuo, and the resulting residue was purified by column chromatography with 6:1 hexanes:EtOAc + 1% TEA to obtain the product as a 1:1 mixture of E / Z isomers (760 mg, 61%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3): 8 vinylic protons at 6.69 (m, 0.5H), 6.37 (m, 0.5H), 5.32 (m, 0.5H), 5.23 (m, 0.5H), acetal methine proton at 4.14 (m, 1H), methyl protons at 3.34 (s, 6H). 10 Step 3. 3-[3-(Dimethoxymethyl)cyclopentyl]-3-[4-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]propanenitrile. To a solution of 4-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidine (230 mg, 0.74 mmol) in ACN (5 mL) was added (2E,Z)-3-[3-(dimethoxymethyl)cyclo-15 pentyl]acrylonitrile (289 mg, 1.48 mmol), followed by DBU (300 ^L, 2.0 mmol). The mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 16 hours, at which point LCMS and TLC indicated complete reaction. The reaction was reduced to dryness in vacuo, and the residue was purified by column chromatography to obtain the product as a mixture of diastereomers (293 mg, 77%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): 8 8.85 (s, 1H), 8.31 (s, 2H), 7.40 (d, 1H), 6.80 (d, 1H), 5.68 (s, 2H), 4.28 (m, 1H), 4.11 20    (m, 1H), 3.54 (t, 2H), 3.36 (s, 1.5H), 3.34 (s, 1.5H), 3.30 (s, 1.5H), 3.26 (s, 1.5H), 3.12 (m, 1H), 2.94 (m, 1H), 2.65 (m, 1H), 2.34 (m, 1H), 2.0-1.0 (m, 6H), 0.92 (t, 2H), -0.56 (s, 9H). MS (EI) m / z = 511.3 (M+H). Step 4. 3-(3-Formylcyclopentyl)-3-[4-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]- 25 pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]propanenitrile. To a solution of 3-[3-(dimethoxymethyl)cyclopentyl]-3-[4-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]-methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]propanenitrile (293 mg, 0.574 mmol) in THF (4.5 mL) was added aqueous HCl (1.0 M, 1.5 mL). The reaction was held at ambient temperature for 2.5 hours at which point TLC and LCMS indicated complete deprotection to the 30 corresponding aldehyde. The reaction was partitioned between water and EtOAc and the aqueous phase was extracted with additional EtOAc. The combined organic phase was washed with water, then sat'd NaHCO3, then sat'd NaCl, and then was dried over MgSO4 and filtered and stripped to dryness to leave the crude product as a mixture of diastereomers. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): 8 9.69 (d, 0.5H), 9.64 (d, 0.5H), 8.85 (s, 0.5H), 8.84 (s, 0.5H), 8.35 (s, 0.5H), 8.34 (s, 0.5H), 8.32 (s, 0.5H), 35    8.30 (s, 0.5H), 7.41 (d, 0.5H), 7.40 (d, 0.5H), 6.80 (d, 0.5H), 6.79 (d, 0.5H), 5.68 (s, 1H), 5.67 (s, 1H), 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 4.32 (m, 1H), 3.54 (m, 2H), 3.14 (m, 1H), 2.96 (m, 2H), 2.76 (m, 1H), 2.1-1.1 (m, 6H), 0.92 (m, 2H), -0.058 (s, 9H). MS (EI) m / z = 465.1 (M+H). Step 5. 3-3-[(E,Z)-(Hydroxyimino)methyl]cyclopentyl-3-[4-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H- 5 pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]propanenitrile. To a solution of 3-(3-formylcyclopentyl)-3-[4-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]propanenitrile (336 mg, 0.000723 mol) in CH3OH (5.0 mL, 0.12 mol) was added hydroxylamine hydrochloride (60 mg, 0.00087 mol) and KHCO3 (110 mg, 0.0011 mol) and the reaction was held at ambient temperature for 16 hours, at which point LCMS 10 indicated complete reaction. The reaction was reduced to dryness in vacuo and the residue was partitioned between water and EtOAc, and the aqueous phase was extracted with additional EtOAc. The combined organic phase was washed with water, then sat'd NaCl, then was dried over MgSO4 and concentrated to leave the crude product, which was carried forward to the subsequent reaction without purification. NMR indicated disappearance of aldehydic protons. MS (EI) m / z = 480.2 (M+H). 15 Step 6.  3-(2-Cyano-1-[4-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H- pyrazol-1-yl]ethyl)cyclopentanecarbonitrile. To a solution of  3-3-[(E,Z)-(hydroxyimino)methyl]cyclopentyl-3-[4-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)- ethoxy]-methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]propanenitrile (324 mg, 0.67 20 mmol) in pyridine (1.2 mL), was added methanesulfonyl chloride (210 ^L, 2.7 mmol) dropwise. The reaction was heated to 60 °C for 2.5 hours, at which point LCMS indicated complete reaction. The reaction was partitioned between water and EtOAc, and the aqueous phase was extracted with additional EtOAc. The combined organic phase was washed with water, then 0.1N HCl, then sat'd NaCl, and then was dried over MgSO4. The crude product was purified by column chromatography to 25 obtain the product as a mixture of diastereomers (164 mg, 52%). The diastereomers were then separated by chiral HPLC to provide four distinct diastereomers, which were taken directly on to the deprotection step. MS (EI) m / z = 462.1 (M+H). Step 7. 3-(2-Cyano-1-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]ethyl)-cyclopentane- 30 carbonitrile trifluoroacetate. The four diastereomers were then separately deprotected in this representative manner. To 3-2-cyano-1-[4-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]ethylcyclopentanecarbonitrile (35 mg, 0.076 mmol) dissolved in CH2Cl2 (2.0 mL) was added TFA (1.0 mL) and the reaction was stirred for 2 hours at ambient temperature at which point LCMS 35 indicated complete cleavage to the N-hydroxymethyl intermediate. The solvent was removed and to the residue was added methanol (1.0 mL) followed by ethylenediamine (40 p.L, 0.61 mmol), the 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 reaction was stirred for 16 hours at which point LCMS indicated complete reaction. The solvent was removed and the residue was purified by preparative LCMS to provide the product as a TFA salt. NOE experiments confirm that all isomers have cis geometry on cyclopentyl ring. Isomers 1 and 2: 1H NMR (400 MHz, CD3OD): 8 8.95 (s, 1H), 8.89 (s, 1H), 8.54 (s, 1H), 7.86 (d, 1H), 7.29 (d, 1H), 5    4.72 (m, 1H), 3.27 (m, 1H), 3.19 (m, 1H), 2.95 (m, 1H), 2.72 (m, 1H), 2.2-1.9 (m, 4H), 1.67 (m, 2H). Isomers 3 and 4: 1H NMR (400 MHz, CD3OD): 8 8.95 (s, 1H), 8.88 (s, 1H), 8.52 (s, 1H), 7.85 (d, 1H), 7.28 (d, 1H), 4.72 (m, 1H), 3.27 (m, 1H), 3.19 (m, 1H), 3.05 (m, 1H), 2.71 (m, 1H), 2.44 (m, 1H), 2.05 (m, 1H), 1.92 (m, 1H), 1.72 (m, 1H), 1.58 (m, 2H).MS (EI) m / z = 332.2 (M+H). 10 Example 98: 3-[3-(Hydroxymethyl)cyclopentyl]-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]propanenitrile OH CN N-N W \ 03 N   H Step 1: 3-[3-(Hydroxymethyl)cyclopentyl]-3-[4-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]propanenitrile 15           A solution of 3-(3-formylcyclopentyl)-3-[4-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo- [2,3-d]pyrimidm-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]propanemtrile (50.0 mg, 0.108 mmol) in methanol (280 j_lL) was cooled to 0 °C, then sodium tetrahydroborate (14 mg, 0.37 mmol) was added. The reaction was held at 0 °C for 10 minutes, at which point LCMS and TLC indicated complete reaction. The reaction was quenched by cautious addition of 1N HCl (3 drops) and methanol (1 mL), followed by addition of 20 aqueous NaHCO3 and CHCl3. The phases were separated and the aqueous phase was washed with additional CHCl3. The combined organic phase was washed with sat'd NaCl, dried over MgSO4 and reduced to dryness. The residue was purified by column chromatography to obtain the product as a mixture of diastereomers (37.4 mg, 74%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCh): 8 _8.84 (s, 1H), 8.31 (s, 2H), 7.40 (d, 1H), 6.80 (d, 1H), 5.67 (s, 2H), 4.29 (m, 1H), 3.53 (m, 1H), 3.53 (t, 2H), 3.14 (m, 1H), 25    2.95 (m, 1H), 2.68 (m, 1H), 2.2-1.0 (m, 9H), 0.92 (t, 2H), -0.059 (s, 9H). MS (EI) m / z = 467.2 (M+H). Step 2. 3-[3-(Hydroxymethyl)cyclopentyl]-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]propanenitrile 30           To   3-[3-(hydroxymethyl)cyclopentyl]-3-[4-(7-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-7H-pyrrolo- [2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]propanenitrile (60.4 mg, 0.129 mmol) dissolved in CH2Cl2 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 (2.0 mL) was added TFA (1.0 mL) and the reaction was stirred for 1 hour at which point LCMS indicated complete cleavage to the N-hydroxymethyl intermediate (m / z = 367). The trifluoroacetate ester of the hydroxymethyl of the cyclopentyl ring was also observed (m / z = 463). The solvent was removed and to the residue was added methanol (1.0 mL) followed by ethylenediamine (80 p,L, 1.19 5 mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred for 16 hours at which point LCMS indicated complete reaction to the desired product. The solvent was removed and the residue was purified by chiral HPLC to provide four distinct diastereomers (20.2 mg total of four isomers, 46%). NOE experiments suggest that all isomers have cis geometry on the cyclopentyl ring. Isomers 1 and 2: 1H NMR (400 MHz, CD3OD): 8 8.65 (s, 1H), 8.62 (s, 1H), 8.38 (s, 1H), 7.50 (d, 1H), 6.95 (d, 1H), 4.51 (m, 1H), 10    3.40 (m, 2H), 3.22 (m, 1H), 3.11 (m, 1H), 2.61 (m, 1H), 2.10 (m, 1H), 1.94 (m, 1H), 1.82 (m, 1H), 1.6-1.4 (m, 3H), 1.03 (m, 1H). Isomers 3 and 4: 1H NMR (400 MHz, CD3OD): 8 8.66 (s, 1H), 8.62 (s, 1H), 8.37 (s, 1H), 7.50 (d, 1H), 6.95 (d, 1H), 4.51 (m, 1H), 3.46 (m, 2H), 3.21 (m, 1H), 3.11 (m, 1H), 2.61 (m, 1H), 2.22 (m, 1H), 2.09 (m, 1H), 1.71 (m, 1H), 1.55-1.25 (m, 3H), 1.04 (m, 1H). MS (EI) m / z = 337.1 (M+H). 15 Example 100: 1-(1H-Pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-indazole (100a) and 2-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]- pyridin-4-yl)-2H-indazole (100b) 20           4-Bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (0.078 g, 0.00040 mol) and 1H-indazole (0.283 g, 0.00240 mol) was heated neat in a sealed tube at 200 °C (an oil bath) overnight with stirring. The reaction was allowed to cool to rt and the crude product was purified by prep LC-MS on a C-18 column eluting with a water / ACN gradient containing 0.2% TFA to give the title compound (0.015 gm, 15%), as an amorphous white solid, LC / MS (M+H)+ 235, 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) 8 12.01 (bs, 1H), 25    9.17(s, 1H), 8.31(s, 1H), 7.73(d, 1H, J=9.0), 7.67(m, 2H), 7.58(m, 1H), 7.28(m, 1H), 7.07(m, 2H). Example 106: 3-[3-(1H-Pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1,2,4-oxadiazol-5-yl]benzonitrile 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 Step 1. 1-[2-Ttrimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-4-carbonitrile CN k N^N CH2O(CH2)2Si(CH3)3 5 4-Bromo-1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (0.300 g, 0.000917 mol) was dissolved in DMF (6.5 mL, 0.084 mol) and then zinc cyanide (0.30 g, 0.0026 mol) was added. The solution was degassed with nitrogen and then bis(tri-t-butylphosphine)palladium (0.1 g, 0.0002 mol) was added. The reaction was sealed and heated in the microwave to 100 °C for 30 10 minutes. The reaction was allowed to cool to rt, taken up in ethyl acetate and washed with water saturated sodium carbonate, brine, dried over magnesium sulfate and concentrated to give an oil. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography (FCC) on silica gel, eluting with a hexane: ethyl acetate gradient to give the product (0.25 gm) as a colorless oil. LC / M S (M+H)+ 274, 1H NMR (CDCla) 8 8.22 (d, 1H), 7.53(d, 1H), 7.40(d, 1H), 6.73(d, 1H), 5.65(s, 2H), 3.50(m, 2H), 15    0.90(m, 2H), 0.0(s, 9H). Step 2. N-Hydroxy-1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-4-carboximidamide HN^NHOH N^N CH2O(CH2)2Si(CH3)3 20            1-[2-(Trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-4-carbonitrile (0.05 g, 0.0002 mol) was dissolved in ethanol (2.0 mL, 0.034 mol), and then hydroxylamine hydrochloride (0.023 g, 0.00033 mol) and potassium carbonate (0.10 g, 0.00073 mol) were added. The reaction was heated to reflux for 5 h, and the reaction was then allowed to cool to rt and filtered to remove the solids. The filtrate was concentrated to give the product 0.06 g as yellow oily residue, LC / MS (M+H)+ 307. 25 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 Step 3. 3-[3-(1-[2-(Trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1,2,4-oxadiazol-5-yl]benzonitrile 5           The crude product N-hydroxy-1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine- 4-carboximidamide (0.06 gm, 0.0002 mol) was dissolved in pyridine (1.0 mL, 0.012 mol) and then 3-cyanobenzoyl chloride (0.040 g, 0.00024 mol) was added at rt. This mixture was stirred for 1 h and heated to 80 °C in an oil bath. After heating for 18 h the reaction was allowed to cool to rt and then diluted with ACN and concentrated in vacuo to give 3-[3-(1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-10 pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1,2,4-oxadiazol-5-yl]benzonitrile 0.08 gm as an off white residue, LC / M S (M+H)+ 418. Step 4. 3-[3-(1H-Pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1,2,4-oxadiazol-5-yl]benzonitrile The crude 3-[3-(1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1,2,4-oxa-15 diazol-5-yl]benzonitrile (0.08 g, 0.0002 mol) was dissolved in TFA (3.0 mL, 0.039 mol) under nitrogen and then heated to 60 °C. After heating for 2 h the reaction was allowed to cool to rt and concentrated in vacuo. The resulting residue was taken up in methanol and concentrated to remove as much of the TFA as possible.  The residue was taken up in methanol (2.0 mL, 0.049 mol) and ammonium hydroxide (1 mL).  This mixture was stirred at rt for 2 h and the reaction was then 20 complete. The reaction was concentrated in vacuo to give the crude product which was purified by prep HPLC on a C-18 column eluting with a ACN:water gradient with 0.2% TFA to give the title compound (0.025 gm, 43%) (M+H)+ 288. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) 8 12.1 (bs, 1H), 8.65(s, 1H), 8.48(d, 1H,J=6.4), 8.39(d, 1H, J=4.8), 8.16(d, 1H, J=6.4), 7.84(t, 1H, J=6.4), 7.75(d, 1H, J=4.8), 7.68(m, 1H), 6.99 (m, 1H). 25 Example 107: 4-(1-Benzothien-2-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 Step 1. 4-(1-Benzothien-2-yl)-1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine 5            1-Benzothien-2-ylboronic acid (0.05 g, 0.0003 mol) and 4-bromo-1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)- ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (0.10 g, 0.00031 mol) were combined in toluene (3.0 mL, 0.028 mol) and ethanol (1.0 mL, 0.017 mol). Potassium carbonate (0.085 g, 0.00062 mol) dissolved in water (1.0 mL) then was added and the reaction was degassed with nitrogen. Then tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) (0.05 g, 0.00004 mol) was added and the reaction was 10 heated to 120 °C in a sealed tube in the microwave for 60 minutes. This was allowed to cool to rt, taken up in ethyl acetate and washed with water 2X, brine, dried over magnesium sulfate and concentrated to give 4-(1-benzothien-2-yl)-1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]-pyridine (0.10 gm) as an oil, LC / MS (M+H)+ 381. 15 Step 2. 4-(1-Benzothien-2-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine Using a procedure analogous to Example 106, Step 4, but using 4-(1-benzothien-2-yl)-1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine, the title compound was prepared as a yellow powder (0.015 g, 18%), LC / MS (M+H)+: 251, 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) 8 11.95 (bs, 1H), 8.28(d, 1H, J=5.4), 8.15(s, 1H), 8.03(m, 1H), 7.96(m, 1H), 7.64(m, 1H), 7.42(m, 2H), 7.39(d, 1H, J=5.4), 20   6.95(m, 1H). Example 120: 4-Fluoro-2-[1-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-3-yl]phenol 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 4-Bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (0.050 g, 0.00025 mol) and 4-fluoro-2-(1H-pyrazol-3-yl)phenol (0.150 g, 0.000842 mol) were heated neat to 160 °C for 5 h. The reaction was allowed to 5 cool to rt and the residue was purified by prep LC-MS on a C-18 column eluting with a water / ACN gradient containing 0.2% TFA to give the title compound, (0.052 g, 20%, as an amorphous white solid, LC / MS (M+H)+ 295, 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) 8 12.01 (bs, 1H), 10.25(bs, 1H), 8.81(s,1H), 8.35(d, 1H, J= 5.5), 7.77(d, 1H, J=9.5), 7.64(m, 1H), 7.59(d, 1H, J=5.5), 7.32(s, 1H), 7.09(m, 1H), 7.05(m, 1H), 7.01(m, 1H). 10 Example 127: 4-3-[3-(Trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-1H-pyrazol-1-yl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine Step 1. (2E)-3-(Dimethylamino)-1-[3-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]prop-2-en-1-one 15                                           / N\ 1-[5-(Trifluoromethyl)phenyl]ethanone (0.20 mL, 0.0013 mol) and 1,1-dimethoxy-N,N-dimethylmethanamine (0.17 mL, 0.0013 mol) were combined in a sealed tube and heated in a microwave to 120 °C for 15 minutes, the reaction was allowed to cool and was concentrated to remove the residual DMF acetal, to give (2E)-3-(dimethylamino)-1-[3-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]prop-20   2-en-1-one, 0.32 gm, as a red oil, LC / MS (M+H)+: 244. Step 2: 3-[3-(Trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-1H-pyrazole 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 The (2E)-3-(dimethylamino)-1-[3-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]prop-2-en-1-one (0.32 g, 0.0013 mol) was dissolved in ethanol (10.0 mL, 0.171 mol) and hydrazine (0.24 mL, 0.0078 mol) under 5 nitrogen and heated to reflux. The reaction was monitored by HPLC and was complete almost immediately. The mixture was allowed to cool to rt and concentrated to give the crude product as an oil. The product was purified by FCC on silica gel eluting with a hexane: ethyl acetate gradient to give 3-[3-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-1H-pyrazole as an oil (0.25 g, 89% ), LC / MS (M+H)+: 213, 1H NMR (CDCI3) 8 8.06 (s, 1H), 7.99(d, 1H, J=7.5), 7.66(d, 1H, J= 2.4), 7.57(m, 1H), 7.55(d, 1H, 10    J=7.5), 6.69(d, 1H, J= 2.4). Step 3. 4-3-[3-(Trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-1H-pyrazol-1-yl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine 4-Bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (0.028 g, 0.00014 mol) and 3-[3-(trifluoromethyl)-phenyl]-1H-pyrazole (0.03 g, 0.0001 mol) were combined neat. The reaction was heated in a sealed 15 tube in an oil bath to 175 °C for 20 to produce a crude product that was a black viscous gum. The crude product was purified by HPLC on a C-18 column eluting with a water:ACN gradient with 0.2% TFA to give the title product (0.025 gm, 50%) as a white amorphous solid, LC / MS (M+H)+: 329, 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) 8 11.95 (bs, 1H), 8.83(d, 1H, J=2.7), 8.31(m, 3H), 7.75(m, 2H), 7.60(m, 2H), 7.35(d, 1H, J=2.7), 7.14(m, 1H). 20 Example 128: 3-[1-(1H-Pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-3-yl]benzonitrile CN N N N H Step 1. 3-[(2E)-3-(Dimethylamino)prop-2-enoyl]benzonitrile 25           3-Acetylbenzonitrile (0.435 g, 0.00300 mol) and 1,1-dimethoxy-N,N-dimethylmethanamine (0.400 mL, 0.00301 mol) were combined and heated in sealed tube to 120 °C in the microwave for 15 min. The reaction was then allowed to cool to rt giving the 3-[(2E)-3-(dimethylamino)prop-2-enoyl]-benzonitrile as a red-orange crystalline material, LC / MS (M+H)+: 201. 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 Step 2. 3-(1H-Pyrazol-3-yl)benzonitrile The 3-[(2E)-3-(dimethylamino)prop-2-enoyl]benzonitrile (0.600 g, 0.00300 mol) was dissolved in ethanol (20.0 mL, 0.342 mol) and hydrazine (0.56 mL, 0.018 mol) under an atmosphere of nitrogen was stirred at room temperature for 1.5 h. The reaction was concentrated in vacuo to give 5 a dark product which was purified by FCC on silica gel, eluting with ethyl acetate-hexane 1:1 to give 3-(1H-pyrazol-3-yl)benzonitrile as an oil (0.430g, 84%), LC / MS (M+H)+: 170. Step 3. 3-[1-(1H-Pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-3-yl]benzonitrile 4-Bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (0.075 g, 0.00038 mol) and 3-(1H-pyrazol-3-yl)benzo-10 nitrile (0.161 g, 0.000952 mol) were heated in sealed tube to 160 °C for 18 h. The resulting product, dark viscous gum, was purified by HPLC on a C-18 column eluting with a water:ACN gradient with 0.2% TFA to give the title product (0.030 g, 27%) as a white amorphous solid, LC / MS (M+H)+: 286, 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) 8 11.95 (bs, 1H), 8.76(s, 1H), 8.36(s, 1H), 8.29(d, 1H, J=7.5), 8.25(d, 1H, J=5.0), 7.79(d, 1H, J= 7.5), 7.62(t, 1H, J= 7.5), 7.53(m, 2H), 7.25(s, 1H), 7.11(m, 1H). 15 Example 153: 3-[1-(1H-Pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]benzonitrile Step 1. 4-(4,4,5,5-Tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H- 20 pyrazole A solution of 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole (2.0 g, 0.010 mol) and DMF (30.0 mL, 0.387 mol) was cooled to 0 °C. Sodium hydride (320 mg, 0.013 mol) (60% in oil) was added and the mixture was stirred for 10 min. [p—(Trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl chloride (2.4 mL, 0.013 mol) was added and the resulting mixture was stirred for 20 min at 0° C and 2 h at room 25 temperature. The reaction was partitioned between water and ethyl acetate. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgSO4 and concentrated to give 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrazole as a crude material. LC / MS (M+H)+: 325, 1H NMR (CDCl3) 8 7.85 (s, 1H), 7.80(s, 1H), 5.45(s, 2H), 3.55(t, 2H), 1.35(s, 12H), 0.95(t, 2H), 0.0(s, 9H). 30 Step 2. 3-(1-[2-(Trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)benzonitrile 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 A mixture of 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]-methyl-1H-pyrazole (150.0 mg, 0.0004625 mol) and 3-bromobenzonitrile (0.10 g, 0.00056 mol) in toluene (2.0 mL, 0.019 mol) and ethanol (0.3 mL, 0.005 mol) was treated with sodium carbonate (98 mg, 0.00092 mol) in water (0.5 mL, 0.03 mol). The mixture was degassed by bubbling nitrogen. 5 Tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) (53 mg, 0.000046 mol) was added and nitrogen was bubbled for 3 min. The reaction was heated in a microwave at 80 °C for 30 min, then allowed to cool to rt and taken up in water and ethyl acetate. The organic layer was dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated to give a crude product, which was purified by FCC on silica gel, eluting with EtOAc / Hexanes (1:5) to give 3-(1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)benzonitrile, as 10 an oil, LC / MS (M+H)+: 300. Step 3. 3-(1H-Pyrazol-4-yl)benzonitrile trifluoroacetate 15           A solution of 3-(1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)benzonitrile (110.0 mg, 0.0003673 mol) was taken up in TFA (3.0 mL, 0.039 mol) and the mixture was heated in microwave at 120 °C for 3 min. The reaction mixture was allowed to cool to rt, and then concentrated to give a crude residue. The product was purified by HPLC on a C-18 column eluting with a water / ACN gradient containing 0.2% TFA to give 3-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)benzonitrile trifluoroacetate as an 20 amorphous white solid, LC / MS (M+H)+: 170. Step 4. 3-[1-(1H-Pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]benzonitrile A mixture of 4-bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (25.0 mg, 0.000127 mol) and 3-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)benzonitrile trifluoroacetate (23.6 mg, 0.0000833 mol) was heated at 180 °C, neat 25 overnight. The crude residue was purified by HPLC on a C-18 column eluting with a water; ACN gradient containing 0.2% TFA to give the title compound as an amorphous white solid, LC / MS (M+H)+: 286, 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) 8 11.85 (bs, 1H), 9.18(s, 1H), 8.42(s, 1H), 8.28(s, 1H), 8.25(d, 1H, J=5.0), 8.07(d, 1H, J=7.0), 7.64(d, 1H, J=7.0), 7.56(t, 1H, J= 7.0), 7.51(m, 1H), 7.47(d, 1H, J=5.0), 7.03(m,1H). 30 Example 170: 2-[1-(1H-Pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]-1,3-benzoxazole 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 Step 1. 4-Hydrazino-1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine H2N'NH k n*^n CH2O(CH2)2Si(CH3)3 5 To 4-bromo-1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (1.98 g, 0.00605 mol) was added hydrazine (11.0 mL, 0.350 mol) followed by addition of methanol (1.0 mL, 0.025 mol) (to improve solubility). The reaction mixture was heated in a sealed tube at 97 °C (an oil bath) for 18 h. The reaction mixture was cooled to rt and formed an off-white solid precipitate. The solid 10 was filtered off and rinsed with cold water and dried to give 4-hydrazino-1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (1.55gm) as a light yellow solid, LC / MS (M+H)+:279, 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) 8 7.98(d, 1H), 7.91(s, 1H), 7.28(d, 1H), 6.69(s, 1H), 6.61(d, 1H), 5.58(s, 2H), 4.37(s, 2H), 3.56(t, 2H), 0.90(t, 2H), 0.0(s, 9H). 15 Step 2. 2-[1-(1-[2-(Trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]- 1,3-benzoxazole CH2O(CH2)2Si(CH3)3 To 4-hydrazino-1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (0.083 g, 20   0.00030 mol) 3782-117-1 and 1,3-benzoxazol-2-ylmalonaldehyde (0.056 g, 0.00030 mol) in toluene (1.5 mL, 0.014 mol) was added molecular sieves. The mixture was heated in a sealed tube at 70 °C 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 (an oil bath) with stirring for 2 h. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the crude product was purified by FCC on silica using ethyl acetate:hexanes 3:7 to give 2-[1-(1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]-1,3-benzoxazole (0.090gm) as an oil, LC / MS (M+H)+: 432. 5 Step 3. Using a procedure analogous to Example 106, Step 4, but using 2-[1-(1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)-ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]-1,3-benzoxazole, the title compound was prepared as a white amorphous powder (0.015 gm, 18%), LC / MS (M+H)+:302, 1H NMR 10    (DMSO-d6) 8 11.85 (bs, 1H), 9.45(s,1H), 8.53(s, 1H), 8.36(bs, 1H), 7.7-7.6(m, 2H), 7.65(d, 1H), 7.56(bs, 1H), 7.38-7.34(m, 2H),7.01(d,1H). Example 172: Cyclohexyl[1-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]methanol 15 Step 1. 4-(4-Bromo-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine A mixture of 4-bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (1.10 g, 0.00558 mol) and 4-bromo-1H-pyrazole (1.2 g, 0.0084 mol) was heated neat to 150 °C for 2 h. DMF was added to dissolve the 20 crude residue. This residue was taken up in EtOAc and washed with 1N NaOH. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated to give a crude 4-(4-bromo-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine residue, LC / MS (M+H)+: 263,265. Step 2. 4-(4-Bromo-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)-1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine 2026204426   09 Jun 2026 Br N CH2O(CH2)2Si(CH3)3 A solution of 4-(4-bromo-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]-1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl chloride (1.4 mL, 0.0079 mol) was added and stirred for 20 min at 0 °C. The reaction was partitioned between ethyl 5 acetate and water. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgSO4 and concentrated to give the crude material. The product was purified by FCC on silica gel (EtOAc / Hexanes, 1 / 10) to give 4-(4-bromo-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)-1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine   as a solid product, LC / MS (M+H)+: 393, 394, 1H NMR (CDCb) 8 8.47(d, 1H, J=7.0), 8.27(s, 1H), 7.88(s, 1H), 7.52(d, 1H, J=4.5), 7.39(d, 1H, J=7.0), 7.069(d, 1H, J=4.5), 5.80(s, 2H), 3.6(t, 2H), 1.95(t, 2H), 10    0.0(s, 9H). Step 3. Cyclohexyl[1-(1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]methanol CH2O(CH2)2Si(CH3)3 15 A mixture of   4-(4-bromo-1H-pyrazol-1-yl)-1-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl-1H- pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (50.0 mg, 0.000127 mol) in THF (2.0 mL, 0.025 mol) under a nitrogen atmosphere was cooled to -78 °C and 1.6 M n-butyllithium in water (1.00 mL, 0.0555 mol). The mixture was stirred for 3 min. The reaction was partitioned between water and EtOAc. The organic 20 layer was dried over MgSO4, filtere...

Claims

1.     A compound which is (R)-3-cyclopentyl-3-[4-(7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]propanenitrile in hydrate or anhydrous form; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.